1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
210 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
214 \begin_inset Note Note
217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
218 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
219 \begin_inset Newline newline
224 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
232 \begin_layout Standard
233 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
234 LatexCommand tableofcontents
241 \begin_layout Chapter
245 \begin_layout Section
246 What is \SpecialChar LyX
250 \begin_layout Standard
252 is a document preparation system.
253 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
254 scripts, publishable books, business
255 letters and proposals,
256 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
260 It is unlike most other
261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
268 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
270 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
286 pt type, left justified, 5
287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
296 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
300 \begin_layout Standard
301 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
306 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
310 \begin_layout Standard
315 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
316 's philosophy: most importantly,
317 the format of all of the manuals.
318 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
319 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
320 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
323 \begin_layout Section
328 \begin_layout Standard
329 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
330 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
332 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
333 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
337 \begin_layout Standard
338 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
339 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
340 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
342 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
343 only a vertical scrollbar.
346 \begin_layout Standard
347 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
348 The first case is large images.
349 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
350 the image and use the option
361 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
364 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
369 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
377 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
384 \begin_layout Section
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
391 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
393 Just select the manual you want to read from the
400 \begin_layout Section
401 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
405 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
412 \begin_layout Standard
413 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
414 can be configured via the menu
416 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
420 \begin_inset Index idx
423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
430 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
432 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
433 packages are available.
434 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
436 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
437 was installed on your system,
438 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
443 \begin_inset space \space{}
446 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
447 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
449 To force \SpecialChar LyX
450 to re-inspect your system use
452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
456 \begin_inset Index idx
459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
460 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
466 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
467 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
470 \begin_layout Section
473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
475 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
482 \begin_layout Standard
483 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
484 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
485 installed but you will not be
487 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
488 or print your documents
492 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
493 Some \SpecialChar LyX
494 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
503 which can produce PDFs and the like.
506 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
508 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
511 every \SpecialChar LyX
512 document can still be output as plain text
513 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
519 \begin_layout Standard
520 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
526 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
527 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
530 \begin_layout Standard
531 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
532 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
533 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
536 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
544 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
545 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
548 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
552 \begin_inset Index idx
555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
556 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
564 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
571 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
575 \begin_layout Chapter
576 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
580 \begin_layout Section
581 Basic File Operations
582 \begin_inset Index idx
585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
594 \begin_layout Standard
599 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
600 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
641 arg "buffer-new-template"
647 \begin_layout Itemize
669 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
681 \begin_layout Itemize
683 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
695 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
711 \begin_layout Itemize
713 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
721 \begin_layout Itemize
743 \begin_layout Itemize
755 arg "buffer-write-as"
759 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
763 \begin_layout Itemize
765 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
781 \begin_layout Itemize
795 \begin_layout Itemize
809 \begin_layout Standard
810 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
811 few minor differences.
814 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
825 command lists the available templates.
826 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
827 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
828 and possibly propose text fragments
830 for the document, features
831 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
834 you would otherwise need to
835 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
837 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
841 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
845 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
853 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
859 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
860 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
864 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
905 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
906 to open a file or create a new one, that big
907 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
911 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
915 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
926 \begin_layout Standard
948 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
950 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
953 people work on the same document at the same time.
957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
958 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
961 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
966 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
967 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
969 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
971 \begin_inset Flex Emph
974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
976 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
977 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
986 \begin_inset Flex Emph
989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
991 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
999 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1010 \begin_inset space ~
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1019 will reload the document from disk.
1020 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1021 and want to restore it to the last save
1022 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1034 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1035 them as your changes.
1038 \begin_layout Section
1039 Basic Editing Features
1040 \begin_inset Index idx
1043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1052 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1059 \begin_layout Standard
1060 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1061 can perform cut and paste operations
1062 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1063 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1064 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1065 editing features and how to access
1067 We will start with cut and paste.
1070 \begin_layout Standard
1071 As you might expect, the
1075 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1076 various other editing features.
1077 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1081 \begin_layout Itemize
1087 \begin_inset Index idx
1090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1119 \begin_layout Itemize
1125 \begin_inset Index idx
1128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1157 \begin_layout Itemize
1163 \begin_inset Index idx
1166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1191 \begin_layout Itemize
1195 \begin_inset space ~
1201 \begin_layout Itemize
1205 \begin_inset space ~
1211 \begin_layout Itemize
1215 \begin_inset space ~
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1225 \begin_inset Index idx
1228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1237 \begin_inset Index idx
1240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1255 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1265 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1271 \begin_layout Standard
1272 The first three are self-explanatory.
1273 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1274 and other programs using
1295 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1296 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1301 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1302 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1303 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1304 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1305 into individual cells.
1309 \begin_inset space ~
1314 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1315 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1319 \begin_layout Standard
1323 \begin_inset space ~
1328 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1330 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1345 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1346 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1347 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1353 \begin_inset space \space{}
1356 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1357 text which is often meaningless.)
1360 \begin_layout Standard
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1367 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1386 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1387 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1388 is inserted as one paragraph.
1389 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1393 \begin_inset space ~
1398 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1399 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1405 \begin_inset space ~
1408 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1414 \begin_inset space ~
1422 \begin_inset space ~
1425 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1428 paste from the primary selection.
1429 This is normally the currently selected text.
1432 \begin_layout Standard
1435 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1437 \begin_inset space ~
1441 \begin_inset space ~
1449 \begin_inset space ~
1453 \begin_inset space ~
1459 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1465 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1468 \begin_inset space ~
1477 \begin_inset space ~
1482 button to skip the curren
1483 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1487 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1494 \begin_inset space ~
1499 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1503 \begin_inset space ~
1508 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1510 If the toggle is set, searching for
1511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 will not match the word
1523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1537 Match whole words only
1539 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1540 to only find complete words, e.
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1545 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1574 also offers an advanced
1577 \begin_inset space ~
1581 \begin_inset space ~
1586 feature that is described in section
1587 \begin_inset space ~
1591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1593 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1600 \begin_layout Standard
1601 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1602 \begin_inset space \space{}
1606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1614 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1616 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1621 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1628 \begin_layout Standard
1632 arg "inset-select-all"
1635 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1636 When the cursor is inside an inset
1639 arg "inset-select-all"
1642 selects the content of the inset.
1646 arg "inset-select-all"
1649 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1650 then to the whole document.
1654 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1657 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1661 \begin_layout Section
1663 \begin_inset Index idx
1666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1673 \begin_inset Index idx
1676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1685 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1692 \begin_layout Standard
1693 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1695 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1698 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1701 or the toolbar button
1708 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1710 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 or the toolbar button
1720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1727 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1731 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1734 \begin_layout Standard
1736 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1737 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1746 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1747 This is a consequence of the 100
1748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 step undo limit mentioned above.
1754 \begin_layout Standard
1763 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1765 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1769 \begin_layout Section
1771 \begin_inset Index idx
1774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1783 \begin_layout Standard
1784 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1787 \begin_layout Enumerate
1792 \begin_layout Itemize
1797 once anywhere in the edit window.
1798 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1802 \begin_layout Enumerate
1807 \begin_layout Itemize
1814 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1817 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1820 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1821 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1823 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1824 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1830 \begin_layout Itemize
1831 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1834 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1841 \begin_layout Enumerate
1842 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1846 \begin_layout Standard
1847 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1848 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1852 \begin_layout Section
1854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1856 name "sec:Navigating"
1861 \begin_inset Index idx
1864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1873 \begin_layout Standard
1875 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1878 \begin_layout Itemize
1883 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1884 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1887 \begin_layout Itemize
1888 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1890 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1897 or by the toolbar button
1900 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1906 \begin_layout Itemize
1907 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1909 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1912 and use the same menu to return to them.
1913 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1916 \begin_layout Standard
1920 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1925 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1926 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1928 \begin_inset space ~
1933 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1934 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1935 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1936 last editing position.
1939 \begin_layout Standard
1944 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1948 \begin_layout Subsection
1950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1952 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Outline
1967 \begin_inset Index idx
1970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1979 \begin_layout Standard
1980 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1981 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1982 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1989 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1993 ), notes, or citations (see section
1994 \begin_inset space ~
1998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2000 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2005 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2009 \begin_layout Standard
2010 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2011 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2012 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2013 dialog and to modify the citation.
2016 \begin_layout Standard
2021 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2022 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2024 Labels and References
2026 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2035 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2038 \begin_layout Standard
2039 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2040 control the display.
2045 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2046 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2051 option keeps it in the current view state.
2052 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2053 \begin_inset space ~
2056 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2057 \begin_inset space ~
2060 3, the subsections of sections
2061 \begin_inset space ~
2064 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2069 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2070 \begin_inset space ~
2074 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2084 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2087 \begin_layout Standard
2094 button refreshes the TOC (
2095 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2097 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2101 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2103 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2107 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2111 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2115 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2119 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2121 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2125 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2127 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2131 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2133 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2137 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2141 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2143 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2147 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2151 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2155 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2159 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2163 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2167 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2171 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2175 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2177 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2181 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2195 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2196 For example, you can move section
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2201 \begin_inset space ~
2204 2.4 or after section
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2210 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2223 (or the corresponding key bindings
2231 ) you can change the level of sections.
2232 You can make section
2233 \begin_inset space ~
2237 \begin_inset space ~
2241 \begin_inset space ~
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2248 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2249 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2252 \begin_layout Subsection
2253 Horizontal Scrolling
2254 \begin_inset Index idx
2257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2258 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2266 \begin_layout Standard
2268 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2270 \begin_inset space ~
2273 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2274 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2275 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2279 \begin_layout Standard
2280 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2284 \begin_layout Itemize
2286 is used on a small tablet computer
2289 \begin_layout Itemize
2290 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2315 \begin_layout Itemize
2316 Math constructs with long command names
2319 \begin_layout Standard
2320 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2321 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2323 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2324 window so that table
2325 \begin_inset space ~
2329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2331 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2336 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2338 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2339 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2342 \begin_layout Standard
2343 \begin_inset Float table
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2356 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2360 Horizontal scrolling test.
2368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2370 \begin_inset Tabular
2371 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2372 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2373 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2417 \begin_layout Section
2418 Input/Word Completion
2419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2421 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2426 \begin_inset Index idx
2429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2436 \begin_inset Index idx
2439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2470 \begin_layout Standard
2472 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2474 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2475 is used to propose completions.
2478 \begin_layout Standard
2479 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2482 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2487 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2494 \begin_inset space ~
2498 \begin_inset space ~
2503 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2507 \begin_inset space ~
2512 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2513 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2517 \begin_inset space ~
2523 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2524 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2525 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2526 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2529 \begin_layout Standard
2531 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2532 completions available.
2537 key to accept a proposed completion.
2538 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2539 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2540 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2543 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2550 \begin_layout Standard
2551 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2552 ing options for text.
2554 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2556 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2558 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2561 he special math option
2565 enables characters to be composed.
2567 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2569 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2573 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2576 you want to insert the character
2577 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2581 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2584 input the characters
2585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2597 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2599 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2603 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2605 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2610 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2612 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2615 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2618 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2620 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2623 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2628 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2630 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2634 's installation folder.
2636 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2637 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2644 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2649 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2650 In the example above,
2655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2687 \begin_layout Section
2689 \begin_inset Index idx
2692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2699 \begin_inset Index idx
2702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2731 \begin_inset Index idx
2734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2765 \begin_layout Standard
2766 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2780 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2783 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2787 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2788 \begin_inset space ~
2792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2794 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2801 \begin_layout Standard
2805 \begin_inset space ~
2813 \begin_inset space ~
2834 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2838 \begin_layout Labeling
2839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2843 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2844 LatexCommand nomenclature
2846 description "Tabulator key"
2853 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2855 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2856 \begin_inset space ~
2860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2862 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2869 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2873 , especially section
2874 \begin_inset space ~
2878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2880 reference "subsec:Lists"
2886 If you are still confused, look in the
2891 \begin_inset Newline newline
2899 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2900 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2904 \begin_layout Labeling
2905 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2909 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2910 LatexCommand nomenclature
2912 description "Escape key"
2920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2927 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2928 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2931 \begin_layout Labeling
2932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2937 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2938 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2942 \begin_layout Standard
2943 There are three modifier keys:
2946 \begin_layout Labeling
2947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2965 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2966 LatexCommand nomenclature
2968 description "Control key"
2973 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2974 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2978 \begin_layout Itemize
2987 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2990 \begin_layout Itemize
2999 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3002 \begin_layout Itemize
3011 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3015 \begin_layout Labeling
3016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3034 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3035 LatexCommand nomenclature
3037 description "Shift key"
3042 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3043 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3046 \begin_layout Labeling
3047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3065 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3066 LatexCommand nomenclature
3068 description "Alt or Meta key"
3073 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3074 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3075 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3081 \begin_inset Newline newline
3084 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3086 menu accelerator keys
3089 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3090 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3094 \begin_layout Standard
3095 For example, the sequence
3096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3102 \begin_inset space ~
3106 \begin_inset space ~
3112 \begin_inset space ~
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3139 \begin_inset space ~
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3160 manual lists all other things bound to the
3168 \begin_layout Standard
3169 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3171 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3173 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3174 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3176 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3177 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3178 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3180 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3196 followed by a capital
3203 \begin_layout Chapter
3206 \begin_inset Index idx
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3219 \begin_layout Section
3221 \begin_inset Index idx
3224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 \begin_layout Subsection
3237 \begin_layout Standard
3238 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3239 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3240 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3241 numbering schemes, and so on.
3242 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3243 and format the title of your document differently.
3246 \begin_layout Standard
3251 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3252 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3253 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3254 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3255 picks one for you by default.
3256 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3259 \begin_layout Subsection
3261 \begin_inset Index idx
3264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3273 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3280 \begin_layout Standard
3281 You can select a class using the
3283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3284 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3288 \begin_inset Index idx
3291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3306 \begin_layout Standard
3307 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3312 \begin_layout Description
3313 Article for basic articles
3316 \begin_layout Description
3317 Report for basic reports
3320 \begin_layout Description
3321 Book for writing a book
3324 \begin_layout Description
3325 Letter for US-style letters
3328 \begin_layout Standard
3329 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3330 only uses if you have installed
3331 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3332 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 distributions will include
3335 Here are some of the classes.
3336 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3338 Special Document Classes
3347 \begin_layout Description
3348 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3351 \begin_layout Description
3352 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3356 \begin_layout Description
3357 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3361 \begin_layout Description
3362 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3363 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3364 There are three article layouts available.
3365 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3366 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3367 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3368 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3373 sequential numbering
3374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3377 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3378 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3379 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3380 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3383 \begin_layout Description
3384 Beamer Layout for presentations
3387 \begin_layout Description
3388 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3389 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3390 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3391 with \SpecialChar LyX
3395 \begin_layout Description
3396 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3399 \begin_layout Description
3401 \begin_inset space ~
3404 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3407 \begin_layout Description
3408 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3411 \begin_layout Description
3412 Foils Used to make transparencies
3415 \begin_layout Description
3416 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3417 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3418 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3419 with \SpecialChar LyX
3423 \begin_layout Description
3424 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3425 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3428 \begin_layout Description
3429 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3432 \begin_layout Description
3433 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3436 \begin_layout Description
3437 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3438 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3439 (Is used by this document.)
3442 \begin_layout Description
3443 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3446 \begin_layout Description
3447 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3450 \begin_layout Description
3455 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3456 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3458 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3462 \begin_layout Description
3463 Slides Used to make transparencies
3466 \begin_layout Description
3468 \begin_inset space ~
3471 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3472 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3475 \begin_layout Description
3476 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3479 \begin_layout Standard
3480 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3482 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3484 Special Document Classes
3491 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3492 of the document classes.
3495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3499 \begin_layout Standard
3500 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3503 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3505 \begin_inset Index idx
3508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3525 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3526 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3528 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3531 \begin_layout Standard
3534 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3539 , are highly specialized.
3541 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3542 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3543 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3544 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3545 by some document class.
3546 There are just too many of them.
3547 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3550 \begin_layout Standard
3551 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3559 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3560 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3561 document class for a new file.
3563 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3566 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3573 manual for information on how to install them.
3574 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3580 \begin_layout Standard
3581 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3582 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3583 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3584 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3585 class files to be used for dissertation
3586 s submitted to those universities.
3587 The \SpecialChar LyX
3588 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3590 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3594 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3600 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3607 name "subsec:Modules"
3612 \begin_inset Index idx
3615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 \begin_layout Standard
3625 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3626 chosen document class.
3627 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3628 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3639 \begin_inset Index idx
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3649 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3653 \begin_layout Standard
3654 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3655 packages or file format converters that are not always
3656 installed by default.
3658 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3659 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3660 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3661 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3663 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3664 file without the missing prerequisites.
3665 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3666 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3669 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3673 \begin_inset Index idx
3676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3677 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3684 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3688 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3692 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3701 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3703 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3714 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3717 \begin_layout Standard
3718 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3726 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3728 will advise you about these things.
3736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3740 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3745 \begin_inset Index idx
3748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 Document ! Local Layout
3757 \begin_layout Standard
3758 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3759 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3760 : They are intended to be used in
3761 a variety of different documents.
3762 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3763 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3764 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3765 need a specific inset or
3766 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3768 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3771 style only that one time.
3772 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3774 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3792 manual for information on how to use it.
3795 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3799 \begin_layout Standard
3800 Each class has a default set of options.
3801 Here's a quick table describing them:
3804 \begin_layout Standard
3805 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3811 \begin_layout Standard
3813 \begin_inset Tabular
3814 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3815 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4274 \begin_layout Standard
4275 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 You're probably also wondering what
4283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4287 \begin_inset space ~
4291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4295 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4296 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4301 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4306 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4316 headings, there are also
4324 headings, and so on.
4325 We will describe these headings fully in section
4326 \begin_inset space ~
4330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4332 reference "subsec:Headings"
4339 \begin_layout Subsection
4341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4343 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4348 \begin_inset Index idx
4351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4358 \begin_inset Index idx
4361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4371 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4380 \begin_inset space ~
4388 \begin_inset space ~
4393 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4395 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4396 doesn't support special options you want to
4397 use for your document.
4398 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4399 -class and its options, you have to read
4403 \begin_layout Standard
4405 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4409 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4413 \begin_inset space ~
4420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4426 \begin_inset space ~
4431 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4432 You can choose between the following five options:
4435 \begin_layout Labeling
4436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4441 Use default page style of current class.
4444 \begin_layout Labeling
4445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4450 No page numbers or headings.
4453 \begin_layout Labeling
4454 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4462 \begin_layout Labeling
4463 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4468 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4469 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4470 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4471 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4474 \begin_layout Labeling
4475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4480 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4481 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4487 \begin_inset Index idx
4490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4498 How they are defined is explained in section
4499 \begin_inset space ~
4503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4505 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4512 \begin_layout Standard
4513 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4514 \begin_inset space ~
4518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4520 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4527 \begin_layout Subsection
4528 Paper Size and Orientation
4529 \begin_inset Index idx
4532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4533 Document ! Paper size
4539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4541 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4548 \begin_layout Standard
4549 You can find the following options in the menu
4552 \begin_inset space ~
4559 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4563 \begin_inset Index idx
4566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4575 \begin_layout Labeling
4576 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4580 \begin_inset space ~
4585 What size paper to print on.
4590 \begin_layout Itemize
4596 \begin_layout Itemize
4602 \begin_layout Itemize
4608 \begin_layout Itemize
4614 \begin_layout Itemize
4617 US letter, US legal, US executive
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4626 \begin_layout Itemize
4633 \begin_layout Labeling
4634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4639 To choose whether to output as
4650 \begin_layout Labeling
4651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4655 \begin_inset space ~
4660 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4661 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4664 \begin_layout Subsection
4666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4668 name "subsec:Margins"
4673 \begin_inset Index idx
4676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4683 \begin_inset Index idx
4686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4695 \begin_layout Standard
4696 Paper margins are set in the menu
4698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4702 \begin_inset Index idx
4705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4714 \begin_layout Standard
4715 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4716 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4717 the paper format and the font size into account.
4720 \begin_layout Subsection
4724 \begin_layout Standard
4725 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4726 has to convert everything into the new
4728 That includes the paragraph environments.
4729 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4730 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4731 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4733 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4742 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4744 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4745 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4746 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4749 \begin_layout Section
4750 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4751 \begin_inset Index idx
4754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 Paragraph ! Indentation
4763 \begin_layout Subsection
4765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4767 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4774 \begin_layout Standard
4775 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4776 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4779 \begin_layout Standard
4780 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4781 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4782 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4783 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4787 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4793 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4794 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4795 language than English.
4797 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4801 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4802 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4803 into \SpecialChar LyX
4805 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4808 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4810 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4811 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4812 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4819 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4820 goes to produce a printable file.
4825 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4827 gives you the ability globally to change
4831 these pre-coded spacings.
4832 We will explain more later.
4835 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 Paragraph Separation
4837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4839 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4844 \begin_inset Index idx
4847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4848 Paragraph ! Separation
4856 \begin_layout Standard
4864 \begin_inset space ~
4872 \begin_inset space ~
4879 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4883 \begin_inset Index idx
4886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4892 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4895 \begin_layout Subsection
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4900 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4903 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4905 \begin_inset space ~
4910 dialog and toggle the
4913 \begin_inset space ~
4918 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4921 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4925 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4926 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4930 \begin_layout Standard
4931 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4932 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4935 \begin_layout Subsection
4937 \begin_inset Index idx
4940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4941 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4949 \begin_layout Standard
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4956 \begin_inset Index idx
4959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4968 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4972 \begin_inset space ~
4981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4982 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4988 \begin_inset Index idx
4991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4998 installed to use this feature.
5003 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5005 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5007 \begin_inset space ~
5012 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5013 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5016 \begin_layout Section
5017 Paragraph Environments
5018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5020 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5025 \begin_inset Index idx
5028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5029 Paragraph ! Environments
5035 \begin_inset Index idx
5038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5039 Paragraph environments|(
5047 \begin_layout Subsection
5051 \begin_layout Standard
5052 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5055 \begin_layout Standard
5064 } \SpecialChar ldots
5074 \begin_inset Newline newline
5077 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5079 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5080 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5081 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5090 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5093 \begin_layout Standard
5094 A paragraph environment is simply a
5095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5102 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5103 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5104 scheme, labels, and so on.
5105 Additionally, you can
5106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5113 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5114 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5115 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5116 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5118 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5120 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5123 \begin_layout Standard
5124 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5125 \begin_inset Graphics
5126 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5132 at the left end of the toolbar.
5134 will change the environment of the
5138 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5139 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5140 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5143 \begin_layout Standard
5152 create a new paragraph using the
5156 paragraph environment.
5158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5165 because if you are in one of these environments:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5174 \begin_layout Itemize
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5186 \begin_layout Itemize
5192 \begin_layout Itemize
5198 \begin_layout Itemize
5204 \begin_layout Itemize
5210 \begin_layout Standard
5212 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5216 , rather than resetting it to
5221 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5222 \begin_inset space ~
5226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5228 reference "sec:Nesting"
5235 \begin_layout Subsection
5239 \begin_layout Standard
5240 The default paragraph environment is
5245 It creates a plain paragraph.
5247 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5248 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5249 this manual) are in the
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5257 You can nest a paragraph using the
5261 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5269 \begin_layout Subsection
5271 \begin_inset Index idx
5274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5284 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5285 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5294 for thanks or contact information.
5295 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5296 places all of this on a separate page
5297 along with today's date.
5298 For other types of documents, the title
5299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5306 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5309 \begin_layout Standard
5311 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5325 Here's how you use them:
5328 \begin_layout Itemize
5329 Put the title of your document in the
5336 \begin_layout Itemize
5337 Put the author name in the
5344 \begin_layout Itemize
5345 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5346 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5352 Note that using this environment is optional.
5353 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5354 will automatically insert today's date.
5355 If you don't want a date, use the option
5357 Suppress default date on front page
5361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5362 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5364 \begin_inset space ~
5372 \begin_layout Standard
5373 You can use footnotes to insert
5374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5381 or contact information.
5384 \begin_layout Subsection
5386 \begin_inset Index idx
5389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5398 name "subsec:Headings"
5405 \begin_layout Standard
5406 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5408 takes care of the numbering for you.
5411 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5413 \begin_inset Index idx
5416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5417 Section headings ! Numbered
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5430 \begin_layout Enumerate
5436 \begin_layout Enumerate
5442 \begin_layout Enumerate
5448 \begin_layout Enumerate
5454 \begin_layout Enumerate
5460 \begin_layout Enumerate
5466 \begin_layout Enumerate
5472 \begin_layout Standard
5474 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5475 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5476 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5477 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5479 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5481 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5487 \begin_layout Standard
5488 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5489 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5490 You group the book into chapters.
5492 does a similar grouping:
5495 \begin_layout Itemize
5500 is divided into either
5511 \begin_layout Itemize
5523 \begin_layout Itemize
5535 \begin_layout Itemize
5547 \begin_layout Itemize
5559 \begin_layout Itemize
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5572 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5580 Not all document types use the
5584 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5589 is the top-level heading.
5597 \begin_layout Standard
5602 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5603 labels it with its number,
5604 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5606 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5620 \begin_inset Index idx
5623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5624 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5632 \begin_layout Standard
5633 The unnumbered section headings have a
5634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5641 at the end of their name.
5642 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5643 the table of contents, see section
5644 \begin_inset space ~
5648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5658 Changing the Numbering
5659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5661 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5668 \begin_layout Standard
5669 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5670 in the Table of Contents.
5671 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5673 Just as certain classes start with
5687 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5697 This is something you can change.
5700 \begin_layout Standard
5703 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5707 \begin_inset Index idx
5710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5719 \begin_inset space ~
5723 \begin_inset space ~
5728 you will see two counters.
5733 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5734 numbers a section heading.
5735 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5739 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5740 Short Titles of Headings
5741 \begin_inset Index idx
5744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5745 Section headings ! Short titles
5751 \begin_inset Argument 1
5754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5763 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5770 \begin_layout Standard
5771 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5772 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5773 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5774 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5777 \begin_layout Standard
5779 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5780 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5781 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5782 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5787 \begin_inset space ~
5793 This will insert a box labeled
5794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5798 \begin_inset space ~
5802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5805 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5806 This also works for captions inside floats.
5807 There can only be one short title per title.
5810 \begin_layout Standard
5811 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5814 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5818 \begin_layout Standard
5819 The following information applies to all section headings:
5822 \begin_layout Itemize
5823 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5830 \begin_layout Itemize
5831 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5835 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5838 \begin_layout Subsection
5842 \begin_layout Standard
5844 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5858 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5859 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5860 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5861 the text they contain.
5862 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5870 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5873 \begin_layout Standard
5874 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5883 when you start a new paragraph.
5884 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5888 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5889 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5890 have to change back to the
5894 environment yourself.
5897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5906 \begin_inset Index idx
5909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5918 \begin_layout Standard
5919 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5920 time for the differences.
5929 are identical except for one difference:
5933 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5942 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5945 \begin_layout Standard
5946 Here's an example of the
5959 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5961 See – no indentation!
5965 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5966 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5967 the other paragraph.
5970 \begin_layout Standard
5971 Here's another example, this time in the
5978 \begin_layout Quotation
5984 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5985 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5986 the first line, then
5990 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5994 you were quoting other text.
5997 \begin_layout Quotation
5998 Here's a new paragraph.
5999 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6000 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6003 \begin_layout Standard
6004 As the examples show,
6008 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6009 They should put quotes in the
6014 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6018 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6023 \begin_inset Index idx
6026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6033 \begin_inset Index idx
6036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6052 \begin_layout Standard
6057 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6063 \begin_inset Newline newline
6066 Which I did not rehearse!
6070 It could be much worse.
6071 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6073 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6074 indented a bit more than the first.
6075 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6081 \begin_inset Newline newline
6084 And make things look fine
6085 \begin_inset Newline newline
6091 arg "newline-insert newline"
6097 \begin_layout Standard
6102 does not indent both margins.
6103 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6104 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6107 arg "newline-insert newline"
6113 \begin_layout Subsection
6115 \begin_inset Index idx
6118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6134 \begin_layout Standard
6136 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6146 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6147 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6156 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6157 lets you provide your own label.
6158 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6159 describing some general features of all four of them.
6162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6169 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6170 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6179 reset the environment to
6183 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6184 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6185 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6189 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6193 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6202 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6203 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6205 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6206 you read all of section
6207 \begin_inset space ~
6211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6213 reference "sec:Nesting"
6220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6222 \begin_inset Index idx
6225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6241 \begin_layout Standard
6242 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6246 paragraph environment.
6247 It has the following properties:
6250 \begin_layout Itemize
6251 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6255 \begin_layout Itemize
6257 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6260 \begin_layout Itemize
6261 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6265 \begin_layout Itemize
6266 The items can have any length.
6268 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6269 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6276 \begin_layout Itemize
6281 environment inside another
6285 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6289 \begin_layout Itemize
6290 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6293 \begin_layout Itemize
6295 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6298 \begin_layout Itemize
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6306 reference "sec:Nesting"
6310 for a full explanation of nesting.
6314 \begin_layout Standard
6315 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6324 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6327 \begin_layout Standard
6328 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6329 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6332 \begin_layout Itemize
6333 The label for the first level
6337 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6341 \begin_layout Itemize
6342 The label for the second level is a dash.
6346 \begin_layout Itemize
6347 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6351 \begin_layout Itemize
6352 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6356 \begin_layout Itemize
6357 Back out to the third level.
6361 \begin_layout Itemize
6362 Back to the second level.
6366 \begin_layout Itemize
6367 Back to the outermost level.
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6371 These are the default labels for an
6376 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6381 dialog in the submenu
6386 \begin_inset Index idx
6389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6395 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6399 \begin_layout Standard
6400 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6401 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6403 \begin_inset space ~
6407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6409 reference "sec:Nesting"
6416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6418 \begin_inset Index idx
6421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6430 name "sec:Enumerate"
6437 \begin_layout Standard
6442 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6443 It has these properties:
6446 \begin_layout Enumerate
6447 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6451 \begin_layout Enumerate
6452 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6456 \begin_layout Enumerate
6458 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6461 \begin_layout Enumerate
6466 environment resets the counter to one.
6469 \begin_layout Enumerate
6482 \begin_layout Enumerate
6483 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6484 Items can have any length.
6487 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6491 \begin_layout Enumerate
6492 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6495 \begin_layout Enumerate
6496 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6500 \begin_layout Standard
6509 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6511 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6512 labels the four different levels in an
6519 \begin_layout Enumerate
6520 The first level of an
6524 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6528 \begin_layout Enumerate
6529 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6533 \begin_layout Enumerate
6534 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6538 \begin_layout Enumerate
6539 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6542 \begin_layout Enumerate
6543 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6548 \begin_layout Enumerate
6549 Back to the third level
6553 \begin_layout Enumerate
6554 Back to the second level.
6558 \begin_layout Enumerate
6559 Back to the outermost level.
6562 \begin_layout Standard
6563 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6567 environment, see section
6568 \begin_inset space ~
6572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6574 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6579 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6583 \begin_layout Standard
6584 There is more to nesting
6588 environments than we've stated here.
6589 You should read section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "sec:Nesting"
6600 to learn more about nesting.
6603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6605 \begin_inset Index idx
6608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6617 \begin_layout Standard
6618 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6622 list has no fixed label.
6623 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6632 of the first line as the label.
6636 \begin_layout Description
6637 Example: This is an example of the
6644 \begin_layout Standard
6646 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6650 \begin_layout Standard
6652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6659 it is meant that the first usage of the
6663 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6665 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6673 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6679 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6681 \begin_inset space ~
6687 \begin_inset space ~
6691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6693 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6697 for more information.) Here is an example:
6700 \begin_layout Description
6702 \begin_inset space ~
6705 Example: This one shows how to use a
6708 \begin_inset space ~
6720 \begin_layout Description
6721 Usage: You should use the
6725 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6726 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6728 It's not a good idea to use a
6732 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6733 You're better off using
6745 paragraphs into them.
6748 \begin_layout Description
6749 Nesting: You can nest
6753 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6757 \begin_layout Standard
6758 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6759 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6760 them from the first line.
6763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6765 \begin_inset Index idx
6768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6777 \begin_layout Standard
6782 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6783 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6787 \begin_layout Standard
6796 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6798 Here are its properties:
6801 \begin_layout Labeling
6802 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6804 \begin_inset space ~
6807 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6816 of each line as the item label.
6821 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6822 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6823 space as described above.
6826 \begin_layout Labeling
6827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6828 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6829 uses different margins for the item label and the
6830 body of the item text.
6831 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6832 label width plus a little extra space.
6835 \begin_layout Labeling
6836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6838 \begin_inset space ~
6841 width \SpecialChar LyX
6842 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6843 If the label width is larger, the label
6844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6851 into the first line.
6852 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6853 margin of the rest of the item text.
6856 \begin_layout Labeling
6857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6859 \begin_inset space ~
6862 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6867 environment has the same left margin.
6868 \begin_inset Newline newline
6871 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6874 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6876 \begin_inset space ~
6881 dialog (toolbar button
6884 arg "layout-paragraph"
6891 \begin_inset space ~
6896 determines the default label width.
6897 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6906 multiple times instead.
6907 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6917 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6920 \begin_inset space ~
6925 every time you alter a label in a
6930 \begin_inset Newline newline
6933 The predefined default width is the length of
6934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6942 \begin_inset space ~
6948 \begin_layout Standard
6953 list the same way as the
6957 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6963 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6972 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6973 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6975 \begin_inset space ~
6979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6981 reference "sec:Nesting"
6985 to learn about nesting.
6988 \begin_layout Standard
6989 There is yet another feature of the
6993 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6994 left-justifies the item labels by
6996 You can use additional
7000 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7001 justifies the item label.
7006 are documented in section
7007 \begin_inset space ~
7011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7013 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7018 Here are some examples:
7021 \begin_layout Labeling
7022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7023 Left The default for
7030 \begin_layout Labeling
7031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7032 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7039 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7042 \begin_layout Labeling
7043 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7044 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7048 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7055 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7058 \begin_layout Subsection
7060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7062 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7067 \begin_inset Index idx
7070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 \begin_layout Standard
7080 The features described in this section require that the module
7082 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7084 is loaded in the document settings.
7085 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7091 \begin_inset Index idx
7094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7105 Custom Enumerate Lists
7106 \begin_inset Index idx
7109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7110 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7118 \begin_layout Standard
7120 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7126 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7127 There you add the command
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7138 \begin_layout Standard
7150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7151 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7152 Code, look at section
7153 \begin_inset space ~
7157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7159 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7172 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7179 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7180 For capital Roman numerals replace
7192 in the command above.
7193 For Arabic numerals use
7201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7208 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7223 \begin_layout Standard
7225 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 You can only number 26
7234 \begin_inset space ~
7237 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7245 \begin_layout Standard
7246 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7247 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7250 \begin_layout Standard
7251 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7254 \begin_layout Enumerate
7255 \begin_inset Argument 1
7258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Enumerate
7285 \begin_inset Argument 1
7288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 \begin_layout Enumerate
7316 \begin_layout Enumerate
7317 \begin_inset Argument 1
7320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7344 \begin_layout Enumerate
7345 \begin_inset Argument 1
7348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7374 \begin_layout Standard
7375 For this list these commands were used:
7378 \begin_layout Standard
7389 \begin_inset Newline newline
7397 \begin_inset Newline newline
7405 \begin_inset Newline newline
7415 \begin_layout Standard
7422 makes the label emphasized and
7431 \begin_layout Standard
7432 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7441 lists until you change the definition.
7449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7451 \begin_inset Index idx
7454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7455 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7463 \begin_layout Standard
7464 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7467 \begin_layout Enumerate
7468 \begin_inset Argument 1
7471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7490 \begin_inset Note Note
7493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7494 goes back to default numbering
7502 \begin_layout Enumerate
7506 \begin_layout Standard
7510 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7514 \begin_layout Standard
7515 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7520 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7521 to indicate that it is a resumed
7522 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7523 , but in the output.
7526 \begin_layout Standard
7527 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7535 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7544 \begin_layout Standard
7545 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7547 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7548 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7549 of a normal enumeration.
7550 There, insert the command
7553 \begin_layout Standard
7559 \begin_layout Standard
7564 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7568 \begin_layout Enumerate
7572 \begin_layout Enumerate
7576 \begin_layout Standard
7577 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7580 \begin_layout Enumerate
7581 \begin_inset Argument 1
7584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7600 This enumeration starts at 4
7603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7605 \begin_inset Index idx
7608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7620 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7623 \begin_layout Itemize
7627 \begin_layout Itemize
7628 with standard spacing
7631 \begin_layout Standard
7632 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7634 Add there the command
7638 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7641 \begin_layout Itemize
7642 \begin_inset Argument 1
7645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7664 \begin_layout Itemize
7668 \begin_layout Itemize
7672 \begin_layout Standard
7673 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7680 \begin_inset Index idx
7683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7691 For more information see its documentation,
7692 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7702 \begin_layout Standard
7703 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7705 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7706 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7710 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7713 \begin_layout Enumerate
7714 \begin_inset Argument 1
7717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7725 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7738 \begin_layout Enumerate
7739 with negative indentation
7742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7743 Further Customization
7744 \begin_inset Index idx
7747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7748 Lists ! Customization
7756 \begin_layout Standard
7757 You can also change the style of description lists.
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7767 \begin_layout Standard
7768 changes the description label font, the command
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7777 \begin_layout Standard
7778 sets the list style.
7781 \begin_layout Standard
7782 An example where the command
7785 \begin_layout Standard
7790 itshape, style=nextline
7793 \begin_layout Standard
7797 \begin_layout Description
7799 \begin_inset space ~
7803 \begin_inset Argument 1
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7812 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7814 itshape, style=nextline
7824 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7825 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7829 \begin_layout Description
7831 \begin_inset space ~
7834 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7835 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7836 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7839 \begin_layout Standard
7840 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7846 \begin_inset Index idx
7849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7857 For more information see its documentation
7858 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7868 \begin_layout Subsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7884 \begin_inset space ~
7887 Address: An Overview
7890 \begin_layout Standard
7891 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7892 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7900 \begin_inset space ~
7906 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7907 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7908 gags on the document.
7909 In contrast, you can use the
7916 \begin_inset space ~
7921 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7922 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7926 \begin_layout Standard
7927 Of course, you're not limited to using
7934 \begin_inset space ~
7943 \begin_inset space ~
7948 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7949 some European academic papers.
7952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7956 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7963 \begin_layout Standard
7968 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7969 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7973 \begin_inset space ~
7978 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7979 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7980 Here's an example of each:
7983 \begin_layout Right Address
7985 \begin_inset Newline newline
7989 \begin_inset Newline newline
7993 \begin_inset Newline newline
7996 When is it? What is today?
7999 \begin_layout Standard
8003 \begin_inset space ~
8009 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8011 the largest block of text on a single line.
8012 Here's an example of the
8019 \begin_layout Address
8021 \begin_inset Newline newline
8024 Where do I send this
8025 \begin_inset Newline newline
8028 Your post office and country
8031 \begin_layout Standard
8032 As you can see, both
8039 \begin_inset space ~
8044 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8049 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8050 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8056 This makes sense, since
8064 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8065 Thus, you have to use
8072 arg "newline-insert newline"
8077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8078 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8080 \begin_inset space ~
8084 \begin_inset space ~
8089 ) to start a new line in an
8096 \begin_inset space ~
8104 \begin_layout Subsection
8108 \begin_layout Standard
8109 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8110 or list of references.
8112 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8115 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8117 \begin_inset Index idx
8120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8129 \begin_layout Standard
8134 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8135 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8136 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8137 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8141 in anything else or vice versa.
8147 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8148 The book document classes ignores the
8152 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8156 in a letter document class.
8159 \begin_layout Standard
8164 environment does several things for you.
8165 First, it puts the centered label
8166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8174 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8176 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8177 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8178 the subsequent text.
8179 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8181 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8185 \begin_layout Standard
8186 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8190 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8191 The new paragraph will still be in the
8196 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8197 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8200 \begin_layout Standard
8201 \begin_inset Float figure
8208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8210 \begin_inset Graphics
8211 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8219 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8224 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8245 \begin_layout Standard
8246 We would love to demonstrate the
8250 environment, but since this document is in the
8251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8258 class, we can't do this.
8259 We inserted it therefore as figure
8260 \begin_inset space ~
8264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8266 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8271 If you have never heard of an
8272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8279 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8284 \begin_inset Index idx
8287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8296 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8308 environment is used to list references.
8309 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8310 only use it at the end of the document.
8322 \begin_layout Standard
8323 When you first open a
8327 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8328 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8344 depending on the document class.
8345 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8346 Each paragraph of the
8350 environment is a bibliography entry.
8355 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8356 Each new paragraph is still in the
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8364 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8365 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8367 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8369 handling, have a look at section
8370 \begin_inset space ~
8374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8376 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8383 \begin_layout Subsection
8384 Special Environments
8387 \begin_layout Standard
8389 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8390 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8398 \begin_inset Index idx
8401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8411 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8418 \begin_layout Standard
8424 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8426 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8431 key as a fixed whitespace.
8435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8453 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8471 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8474 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8477 arg "newline-insert newline"
8494 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8495 So, when you finish using the
8500 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8501 Also, you can nest the
8506 environment inside of others.
8509 \begin_layout Standard
8510 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8517 arg "newline-insert newline"
8520 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8525 \begin_inset space \space{}
8535 arg "newline-insert newline"
8541 \begin_layout Itemize
8545 arg "newline-insert newline"
8555 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8563 You must put at least one
8567 in any line you want blank.
8568 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8577 since that will insert
8582 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8585 arg "self-insert \""
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8595 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8599 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8603 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8607 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8611 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8612 printf("Hello World!
8617 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8621 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8625 \begin_layout Standard
8626 This is just the standard
8627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8637 \begin_layout Standard
8643 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8645 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8646 as if you used a typewriter.
8647 \begin_inset Index idx
8650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8651 Paragraph environments|)
8656 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8659 Program Code Listings
8664 \begin_inset space ~
8672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8676 \begin_inset Index idx
8679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8688 \begin_layout Standard
8693 environment is similar to the
8698 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8699 computer console text.
8704 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8718 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8719 you can have empty lines.
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8733 have a certain language and a text style
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8738 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8739 and \SpecialChar TeX
8743 \begin_layout Standard
8744 Because of these properties
8748 works like a typewriter.
8752 \begin_layout Verbatim
8757 \begin_layout Verbatim
8761 The following 2 lines are empty:
8764 \begin_layout Verbatim
8768 \begin_layout Verbatim
8772 \begin_layout Verbatim
8774 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8779 \begin_layout Standard
8784 environment is identical to
8788 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8789 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8796 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8801 \begin_layout Section
8802 Nesting Environments
8803 \begin_inset Index idx
8806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8807 Nesting ! Environments
8813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8822 \begin_layout Subsection
8826 \begin_layout Standard
8828 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8830 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8832 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8834 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8846 \begin_layout Enumerate
8850 \begin_layout Enumerate
8855 \begin_layout Enumerate
8859 \begin_layout Enumerate
8864 \begin_layout Enumerate
8868 \begin_layout Standard
8869 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8870 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8872 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8874 \begin_inset space ~
8878 \begin_inset space ~
8886 \begin_inset space ~
8890 \begin_inset space ~
8895 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8897 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8900 arg "depth-increment"
8906 arg "depth-decrement"
8920 arg "depth-increment"
8926 arg "depth-decrement"
8930 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8931 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8935 \begin_layout Standard
8936 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8937 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8938 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8939 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8940 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8943 \begin_layout Standard
8944 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8946 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8948 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8951 \begin_layout Subsection
8952 What You Can and Can't Nest
8955 \begin_layout Standard
8956 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8957 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8960 \begin_layout Standard
8961 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8962 than a simple yes or no.
8963 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8966 \begin_layout Itemize
8967 Completely unnestable
8970 \begin_layout Itemize
8971 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8975 \begin_layout Itemize
8976 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8980 \begin_layout Standard
8981 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8982 environments have them:
8985 \begin_layout Description
8986 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8987 Can't nest into them.
8991 \begin_layout Itemize
8997 \begin_layout Itemize
9003 \begin_layout Itemize
9009 \begin_layout Itemize
9015 \begin_layout Itemize
9022 \begin_layout Description
9024 \begin_inset space ~
9027 Nestable You can nest them.
9028 You can nest other things into them.
9032 \begin_layout Itemize
9038 \begin_layout Itemize
9044 \begin_layout Itemize
9050 \begin_layout Itemize
9056 \begin_layout Itemize
9062 \begin_layout Itemize
9068 \begin_layout Itemize
9074 \begin_layout Itemize
9081 \begin_layout Itemize
9087 \begin_layout Itemize
9094 \begin_layout Description
9095 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9096 You can't nest anything into them.
9100 \begin_layout Itemize
9106 \begin_layout Itemize
9112 \begin_layout Itemize
9118 \begin_layout Itemize
9124 \begin_layout Itemize
9130 \begin_layout Itemize
9136 \begin_layout Itemize
9142 \begin_layout Itemize
9148 \begin_layout Itemize
9154 \begin_layout Itemize
9160 \begin_layout Itemize
9166 \begin_layout Itemize
9172 \begin_layout Itemize
9178 \begin_layout Itemize
9182 \begin_inset space ~
9188 \begin_layout Itemize
9195 \begin_layout Standard
9196 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9204 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9214 \begin_inset space ~
9217 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9218 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9219 nested section headings violate this.
9227 \begin_layout Subsection
9228 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9229 \begin_inset Index idx
9232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9233 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9241 \begin_layout Standard
9242 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9243 affected by nesting anyhow.
9247 \begin_layout Itemize
9251 \begin_layout Itemize
9255 \begin_layout Itemize
9259 \begin_layout Standard
9261 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9269 Figures and tables in
9273 are not affected by this.
9278 Have a look at section
9279 \begin_inset space ~
9283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9285 reference "sec:Floats"
9289 for more information about
9296 \begin_layout Standard
9298 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9299 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9303 \begin_layout Standard
9304 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9312 of its own, it behaves just like a
9313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9320 paragraph environment.
9321 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9325 \begin_layout Standard
9326 Here's an example with a table:
9329 \begin_layout Enumerate
9334 \begin_layout Enumerate
9335 This is (a) and it's nested.
9339 \begin_layout Standard
9340 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9346 \begin_layout Standard
9348 \begin_inset Tabular
9349 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9350 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9351 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9436 \begin_layout Standard
9437 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9444 \begin_layout Enumerate
9446 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9450 \begin_layout Enumerate
9454 \begin_layout Standard
9455 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9458 \begin_layout Enumerate
9463 \begin_layout Enumerate
9464 This is (a) and it's nested.
9468 \begin_layout Standard
9469 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9475 \begin_layout Standard
9477 \begin_inset Tabular
9478 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9479 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9480 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9481 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9565 \begin_layout Standard
9566 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9572 \begin_layout Enumerate
9579 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9582 \begin_layout Enumerate
9586 \begin_layout Standard
9587 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9591 \begin_layout Standard
9592 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9595 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9598 \begin_layout Enumerate
9603 \begin_layout Enumerate
9604 This is (a) and it's nested.
9607 \begin_layout Standard
9608 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9614 \begin_layout Standard
9616 \begin_inset Tabular
9617 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9618 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9619 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9705 \begin_layout Standard
9706 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9712 \begin_layout Enumerate
9714 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9721 \begin_layout Enumerate
9725 \begin_layout Standard
9726 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9732 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9733 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9737 \begin_layout Subsection
9738 Usage and General Features
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9743 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9752 is the innermost possible depth.
9753 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9756 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 level #1 – outermost
9761 \begin_layout Enumerate
9766 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 \begin_layout Enumerate
9776 \begin_layout Itemize
9781 \begin_layout Itemize
9790 \begin_layout Standard
9791 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9792 both of them in the example.
9793 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9803 For example, if we tried to nest another
9808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9815 , we would get errors.
9818 \begin_layout Subsection
9820 \begin_inset Index idx
9823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9832 \begin_layout Standard
9833 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9834 We have several examples of nested environments.
9835 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9840 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9843 \begin_layout Labeling
9844 \labelwidthstring MMM
9845 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9854 \begin_layout Labeling
9855 \labelwidthstring MMM
9856 #2-a This is level #2.
9857 We created it by using
9860 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9866 arg "depth-increment"
9873 \begin_layout Labeling
9874 \labelwidthstring MMM
9875 #3-a This is level #3.
9876 This time, we just enter
9883 arg "depth-increment"
9887 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9891 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9897 arg "depth-increment"
9904 \begin_layout Standard
9909 environment, nested inside of
9910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9918 So, it's at level #4.
9919 We did this by entering
9922 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9928 arg "depth-increment"
9931 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9936 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9952 \begin_layout Standard
9957 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9960 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9966 \begin_layout Labeling
9967 \labelwidthstring MMM
9968 #4-a This is level #4.
9972 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9975 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9980 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9984 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9989 keep nesting things inside
9990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10001 \begin_layout Labeling
10002 \labelwidthstring MMM
10003 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10008 \begin_layout Labeling
10009 \labelwidthstring MMM
10010 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10011 and this is level #6.
10012 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10016 \begin_layout Labeling
10017 \labelwidthstring MMM
10018 #5-b Back to level #5.
10022 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10028 arg "depth-decrement"
10035 \begin_layout Labeling
10036 \labelwidthstring MMM
10040 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10046 arg "depth-decrement"
10049 , we're back at level #4.
10053 \begin_layout Labeling
10054 \labelwidthstring MMM
10055 #3-b Back to level #3.
10056 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10060 \begin_layout Labeling
10061 \labelwidthstring MMM
10062 #2-b Back to level #2.
10066 \begin_layout Labeling
10067 \labelwidthstring MMM
10068 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10069 After this sentence, we will enter
10073 and change the paragraph environment back to
10080 \begin_layout Standard
10081 We could have also used the
10097 environment in place of the
10102 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10106 Example 2: Inheritance
10109 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10110 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10113 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10122 arg "depth-increment"
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10129 which, we will change to the
10137 \begin_layout Enumerate
10142 environment, at level #2.
10145 \begin_layout Enumerate
10146 Notice how the nested
10150 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10154 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10158 \begin_layout Standard
10159 We ended this example by entering
10164 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10168 and reset the nesting depth by using
10171 arg "depth-decrement"
10177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10178 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10187 \begin_inset Argument 1
10190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10191 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10199 \begin_layout Enumerate
10200 This is level #1, in an
10204 paragraph environment.
10205 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10209 \begin_layout Enumerate
10214 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10220 arg "depth-increment"
10224 Now, what happens if we nest an
10228 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10229 label be? An asterisk?
10233 \begin_layout Itemize
10243 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10244 So, its label is a bullet.
10245 (We got here by using
10248 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10254 arg "depth-increment"
10257 , then changing the environment to
10265 \begin_layout Itemize
10266 Here's level #4, produced using
10269 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10275 arg "depth-increment"
10279 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10284 \begin_layout Enumerate
10286 to get to level #5.
10287 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10292 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10296 , because we are in the
10304 environment (that is, it is an
10319 \begin_layout Enumerate
10324 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10325 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10329 \begin_layout Enumerate
10330 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10333 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10336 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10339 \begin_layout Enumerate
10343 arg "depth-decrement"
10346 to decrease the depth after the next
10349 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10356 \begin_layout Enumerate
10358 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10363 \begin_layout Enumerate
10365 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10366 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10370 \begin_layout Enumerate
10371 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10380 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10385 reset the counter for the label.
10389 \begin_layout Enumerate
10393 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10399 arg "depth-decrement"
10402 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10403 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10404 into the twofold-nested
10412 \begin_layout Enumerate
10413 The same thing happens if we do another
10416 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10422 arg "depth-decrement"
10425 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10428 \begin_layout Standard
10429 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10434 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10445 The number of other
10449 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10456 The same rule applies for the
10460 environment, as well.
10463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10464 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10467 \begin_layout Enumerate
10468 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10469 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10470 the same detail with how we did it.
10479 \begin_layout Standard
10487 arg "depth-increment"
10494 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10495 the example in parentheses someplace.
10496 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10497 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10498 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10502 \begin_layout Enumerate
10507 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10511 \begin_layout Verse
10512 Now we will add verse.
10513 \begin_inset Newline newline
10516 It will get much worse.
10517 \begin_inset Newline newline
10527 arg "depth-increment"
10537 \begin_layout Verse
10538 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10539 \begin_inset Newline newline
10542 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10543 \begin_inset Newline newline
10549 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10557 \begin_layout Verse
10558 Here comes a table:
10562 \begin_layout Standard
10563 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10569 \begin_layout Standard
10571 \begin_inset Tabular
10572 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10573 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10574 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10660 \begin_layout Verse
10664 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10674 arg "depth-increment"
10680 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10686 \begin_inset Newline newline
10694 arg "depth-decrement"
10701 \begin_layout Enumerate
10706 : level #1) This is another item.
10707 Note that selecting a
10711 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10712 3 times to put the table inside the
10719 \begin_layout Quotation
10720 We're now ending the
10724 list and changing to
10729 We're still at level #1.
10730 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10731 The next set of paragraphs is a
10732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10739 We will nest both the
10746 \begin_inset space ~
10751 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10755 for the letter body.
10759 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10762 to preserve the depth.
10763 Remember that you need to use
10766 arg "newline-insert newline"
10769 to create multiple lines inside the
10776 \begin_inset space ~
10786 \begin_layout Right Address
10788 \begin_inset Newline newline
10791 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10792 \begin_inset Newline newline
10798 \begin_layout Address
10800 \begin_inset space ~
10806 \begin_layout Quotation
10807 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10811 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10812 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10813 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10814 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10815 as soon as possible.
10816 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10819 \begin_layout Quotation
10820 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10821 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10822 with your order, along with payment.
10825 \begin_layout Quotation
10826 We thank you again for your patience.
10829 \begin_layout Address
10831 \begin_inset Newline newline
10838 \begin_layout Quotation
10839 That ends that example!
10842 \begin_layout Standard
10843 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10844 gives you a lot of power with just
10846 We could have easily nested an
10867 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10870 \begin_layout Subsection
10872 \begin_inset Index idx
10875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10876 Nesting ! Separation
10882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10884 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10891 \begin_layout Standard
10892 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10894 For example you need two different enumerations:
10897 \begin_layout Enumerate
10902 \begin_layout Enumerate
10907 \begin_layout Enumerate
10911 \begin_layout Standard
10912 \begin_inset Separator plain
10918 \begin_layout Itemize
10924 \begin_layout Standard
10925 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10931 \begin_layout Enumerate
10935 \begin_layout Enumerate
10939 \begin_layout Enumerate
10943 \begin_layout Standard
10944 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10945 list item and use the menu
10947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10948 Separated <Name> Above
10952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10953 Separated <Name> Below
10956 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10957 ) and before or behind it the
10959 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10962 \begin_layout Standard
10963 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10964 (red arrow in LyX).
10965 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10966 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10969 \begin_layout Standard
10970 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10973 arg "paragraph-break"
10980 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10983 \begin_layout Section
10984 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10985 \begin_inset Index idx
10988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10997 \begin_layout Standard
10998 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10999 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11001 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11002 be broken at the end of a line.
11003 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11007 \begin_layout Subsection
11009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11011 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11016 \begin_inset Index idx
11019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11028 \begin_layout Standard
11029 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11030 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11031 ) not to break the line at
11033 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11036 \begin_layout Quote
11037 Further documentation is given in section
11038 \begin_inset Newline newline
11042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11044 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11051 \begin_layout Standard
11052 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11067 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11076 A protected space is set with
11078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11079 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11081 \begin_inset space ~
11089 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11095 \begin_layout Subsection
11097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11099 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11104 \begin_inset Index idx
11107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11108 Spacing ! Horizontal
11116 \begin_layout Standard
11117 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11120 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11124 The length units are listed in Appendix
11125 \begin_inset space ~
11129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11131 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11138 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11140 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11142 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11147 \begin_inset Index idx
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11151 Spaces ! Inter-word
11159 \begin_layout Standard
11160 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11161 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11162 at the ends of sentences.
11163 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11164 automatically takes care about this.
11165 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11166 followed by a period; see section
11167 \begin_inset space ~
11171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11173 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11178 To insert a normal space, select
11180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11181 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11183 \begin_inset space ~
11191 arg "space-insert normal"
11197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11201 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11206 \begin_inset Index idx
11209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11218 \begin_layout Standard
11220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11227 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11236 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11237 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11238 inside abbreviations:
11241 \begin_layout Quote
11243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11247 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11250 \begin_layout Standard
11251 or between values and units.
11252 Compare for example this:
11253 \begin_inset Newline newline
11257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11261 \begin_inset Newline newline
11264 10 kg (normal space
11267 \begin_layout Standard
11268 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11271 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11273 \begin_inset space ~
11281 arg "space-insert thin"
11287 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11291 \begin_layout Standard
11292 You can also insert the following space types:
11295 \begin_layout Description
11297 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11299 \begin_inset space ~
11305 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11309 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11313 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11317 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11319 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11322 space between the arrows.
11323 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11327 \begin_layout Description
11329 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11331 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11335 \begin_inset space ~
11338 space A line with a
11339 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11343 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11347 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11351 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11353 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11356 space between the arrows.
11359 \begin_layout Description
11361 \begin_inset space ~
11365 \begin_inset space ~
11368 space A line with a
11369 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11373 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11377 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11380 negative thin space between the arrows.
11383 \begin_layout Description
11385 \begin_inset space ~
11389 \begin_inset space ~
11392 space A line with a
11393 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11397 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11401 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11404 negative medium space between the arrows.
11407 \begin_layout Description
11409 \begin_inset space ~
11413 \begin_inset space ~
11416 space A line with a
11417 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11421 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11425 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11428 negative thick space between the arrows.
11431 \begin_layout Description
11433 \begin_inset space ~
11437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11441 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11445 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11449 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11453 \begin_inset space ~
11457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11460 em) space between the arrows.
11463 \begin_layout Description
11465 \begin_inset space ~
11469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11473 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11477 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11481 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11485 \begin_inset space ~
11489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11492 em) space between the arrows.
11495 \begin_layout Description
11497 \begin_inset space ~
11501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11505 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11509 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11513 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11524 em) space between the arrows.
11527 \begin_layout Description
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11537 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11542 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11549 cm space between the arrows.
11552 \begin_layout Standard
11554 \begin_inset space ~
11558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11560 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11564 lists the different space sizes.
11567 \begin_layout Standard
11568 \begin_inset Float table
11575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11576 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11581 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11585 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11595 \begin_inset Tabular
11596 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11597 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11598 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11599 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11696 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11702 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11713 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11724 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11730 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11741 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11771 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11930 \begin_inset Index idx
11933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11942 \begin_layout Standard
11943 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11944 feature for adding extra space
11945 in a uniform fashion.
11946 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11947 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11948 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11949 equally between themselves.
11952 \begin_layout Standard
11953 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11956 \begin_layout Quote
11958 This is on the left side
11959 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11962 This is on the right
11965 \begin_layout Quote
11968 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11972 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11978 \begin_layout Quote
11981 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11985 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11989 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11995 \begin_layout Standard
11996 That was an example in the
12002 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12006 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12010 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12013 is one in a standard paragraph.
12014 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12018 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12021 \begin_layout Standard
12022 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12025 \begin_inset space ~
12030 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12033 \begin_layout Standard
12035 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12039 \begin_inset space ~
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12047 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12051 \begin_inset space ~
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12063 \begin_inset space ~
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12071 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12075 \begin_inset space ~
12081 \begin_layout Standard
12083 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12085 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12089 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12090 (= opened downwards)
12093 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12097 \begin_inset space ~
12103 \begin_layout Standard
12105 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12107 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12111 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12115 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12119 \begin_inset space ~
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12134 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12138 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12140 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12141 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12145 option in the space dialog.
12153 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12157 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12162 \begin_inset Index idx
12165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12175 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12176 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12179 \begin_layout Standard
12180 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12183 What is correct English?:
12184 \begin_inset Newline newline
12188 \begin_inset Newline newline
12192 \begin_inset space ~
12195 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12196 \begin_inset Newline newline
12200 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12211 \begin_inset Newline newline
12215 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12226 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12232 \begin_layout Standard
12234 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12239 \begin_inset space ~
12243 \begin_inset space ~
12247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12251 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12258 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12264 \begin_inset space ~
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12275 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12284 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12285 That is why it is named
12286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12294 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12295 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12299 \begin_layout Subsection
12301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12303 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12308 \begin_inset Index idx
12311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12320 \begin_layout Standard
12321 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12323 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12324 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12326 \begin_inset space ~
12332 There you find the following sizes:
12335 \begin_layout Standard
12348 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12349 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12354 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12365 \begin_inset Index idx
12368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12369 Document ! Settings
12374 for the paragraph separation.
12375 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12384 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12388 \begin_layout Standard
12390 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12399 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12400 size including line spacing.
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12411 \begin_inset Index idx
12414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12420 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12421 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12426 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12427 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12436 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12445 s are described in section
12446 \begin_inset space ~
12450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12452 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12461 If there are several
12465 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12466 You can therefore use
12470 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12473 \begin_layout Standard
12478 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12479 \begin_inset space ~
12483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12485 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12492 \begin_layout Standard
12493 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12503 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12504 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12516 \begin_layout Subsection
12517 Paragraph Alignment
12518 \begin_inset Index idx
12521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12522 Paragraph ! Alignment
12530 \begin_layout Standard
12531 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12533 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12536 dialog (toolbar button
12539 arg "layout-paragraph"
12543 There are five possibilities:
12546 \begin_layout Itemize
12554 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12560 \begin_layout Itemize
12568 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12574 \begin_layout Itemize
12582 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12588 \begin_layout Itemize
12596 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12602 \begin_layout Itemize
12610 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12616 \begin_layout Standard
12617 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12618 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12619 the left and right margins.
12620 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12623 \begin_layout Standard
12625 This paragraph is right aligned,
12628 \begin_layout Standard
12630 this one is centered,
12633 \begin_layout Standard
12635 this one is left aligned.
12638 \begin_layout Subsection
12640 \begin_inset Index idx
12643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12644 Page breaks ! Forced
12650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12652 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12659 \begin_layout Standard
12660 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12662 force a page break where you want one.
12663 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12664 is good at page breaking.
12665 Only if you use a lot of
12669 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12670 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12675 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12679 have to change the page breaking.
12682 \begin_layout Standard
12683 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12685 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12688 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12690 \begin_inset space ~
12696 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12699 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12701 \begin_inset space ~
12706 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12708 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12709 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12713 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12714 at the top of a page.
12715 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12717 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12718 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12719 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12723 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12727 to learn more about
12734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12738 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12743 \begin_inset Index idx
12746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 Page breaks ! Clear
12755 \begin_layout Standard
12756 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12757 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12758 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12759 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12760 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12763 \begin_layout Standard
12764 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12769 \begin_inset space ~
12775 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12778 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12784 \begin_inset space ~
12789 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12790 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12793 \begin_layout Subsection
12795 \begin_inset Index idx
12798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12807 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12814 \begin_layout Standard
12815 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12817 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12820 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12826 \begin_inset space ~
12834 arg "newline-insert newline"
12838 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12841 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12847 \begin_inset space ~
12855 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12858 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12860 This is useful to avoid
12861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12868 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12871 \begin_layout Standard
12872 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12873 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12875 very good at line breaking.
12876 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12877 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12878 \begin_inset space ~
12882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12884 reference "sec:Quote"
12889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12891 reference "sec:Verse"
12896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12898 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12905 \begin_layout Subsection
12907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12909 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12914 \begin_inset Index idx
12917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12926 \begin_layout Standard
12928 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12939 \begin_layout Standard
12943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12944 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12946 \begin_inset space ~
12951 you can insert horizontal lines.
12952 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12953 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12954 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12957 \begin_layout Standard
12959 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12970 \begin_layout Section
12971 Characters and Symbols
12974 \begin_layout Standard
12975 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12976 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12977 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12985 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12989 for information on how this is done.
12992 \begin_layout Standard
12993 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12998 dialog via the menu
13000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13001 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13007 \begin_layout Standard
13008 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13016 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13017 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13019 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13027 \begin_layout Section
13028 Fonts and Text Styles
13029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13031 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13038 \begin_layout Subsection
13040 \begin_inset Index idx
13043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13052 \begin_layout Standard
13053 There are two types of fonts:
13056 \begin_layout Description
13058 \begin_inset space ~
13062 \begin_inset Index idx
13065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13071 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13076 characters) in the font.
13077 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13078 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13079 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13080 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13081 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13082 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13083 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13084 \begin_inset Newline newline
13087 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13088 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13089 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13090 sizes than at small ones.
13091 \begin_inset Newline newline
13105 \begin_inset space ~
13113 \begin_layout Description
13115 \begin_inset space ~
13119 \begin_inset Index idx
13122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13128 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13129 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13130 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13131 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13132 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13133 image manipulation program.
13134 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13135 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13136 \begin_inset space ~
13139 pixels high up to 34
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13143 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13144 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13145 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13147 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13148 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13149 \begin_inset Newline newline
13152 Bitmap fonts are named
13155 \begin_inset space ~
13160 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13163 \begin_layout Standard
13164 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13165 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13166 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13167 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13168 use scalable fonts.
13171 \begin_layout Standard
13172 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13175 \begin_layout Standard
13176 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13178 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13180 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13183 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13184 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13185 font, to emphasize text you use an
13186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13194 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13196 In \SpecialChar LyX
13197 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13201 \begin_layout Subsection
13204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13206 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13213 \begin_layout Standard
13214 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13215 used its own fonts.
13216 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13217 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13220 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13221 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13222 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13223 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13224 to a word processor.
13225 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13226 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13227 files are very portable across
13228 different machines.
13229 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13230 has increased a lot
13231 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13234 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13242 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13247 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13248 code in the document
13249 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13252 \begin_layout Standard
13253 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13254 engines that are also able directly
13255 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13257 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13259 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13261 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13262 that is installed on your system.
13263 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13266 \begin_layout Standard
13267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13275 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13276 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13284 \begin_layout Subsection
13285 Document Font and Font size
13286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13288 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13293 \begin_inset Index idx
13296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13303 \begin_inset Index idx
13306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13315 \begin_layout Standard
13316 You can set the document fonts in the
13318 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13322 \begin_inset Index idx
13325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13326 Document ! Settings
13336 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13337 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13340 \begin_inset space ~
13349 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13351 \begin_inset space ~
13354 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13357 \begin_layout Standard
13362 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13363 This requires that you use
13375 as the output format, i.
13376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13380 \begin_inset space \space{}
13383 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13384 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13385 installed (see section
13386 \begin_inset space ~
13390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13392 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13397 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13399 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13400 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13402 \begin_inset space ~
13405 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13406 cannot determine the family.
13407 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13408 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13411 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13414 \begin_layout Standard
13415 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13416 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13421 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13427 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13429 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13431 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13434 font encoding, this is
13435 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13436 , depending on the document language,
13439 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13440 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13448 \begin_inset space ~
13454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13464 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13465 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13473 \begin_inset space ~
13479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13487 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13508 European Computer Modern
13511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13519 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13522 \begin_layout Standard
13527 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13528 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13533 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13536 \begin_inset space ~
13541 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13547 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13548 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13551 \begin_layout Itemize
13555 \begin_inset space ~
13560 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13573 \begin_inset space ~
13578 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13579 community in order to replace
13583 as the default font.
13584 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13585 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13588 \begin_inset space ~
13601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13602 One difference is improved kerning.
13610 \begin_layout Itemize
13611 If you do not like the look of
13619 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13630 \begin_inset space ~
13640 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13641 \begin_inset space ~
13644 serif and typewriter fonts,
13648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13649 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13656 \begin_inset space ~
13665 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13670 \begin_inset space \space{}
13678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13682 \begin_inset space \space{}
13688 \begin_inset space ~
13696 \begin_inset space ~
13706 but you can also select your own.
13707 \begin_inset Newline newline
13710 The differences between roman,
13713 \begin_inset space ~
13722 fonts are explained in section
13723 \begin_inset space ~
13727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13729 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13734 \begin_inset Newline newline
13740 \begin_inset space ~
13745 was originally designed for newspapers.
13746 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13747 into the small newspaper columns.
13751 \begin_inset space ~
13756 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13759 \begin_layout Standard
13760 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13773 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13778 depends on the class you are using.
13779 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13782 \begin_layout Standard
13783 Note that the font size is the
13788 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13789 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13790 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13791 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13794 \begin_inset space ~
13800 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13801 \begin_inset space ~
13805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13807 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13818 \begin_inset space ~
13823 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13825 \begin_inset space ~
13828 serif or typewriter.
13833 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13843 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13846 \begin_layout Standard
13851 LaTeX font encoding
13853 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13854 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13860 \begin_inset Index idx
13863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13871 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13873 \begin_inset space ~
13877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13879 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13886 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13887 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13888 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13892 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13900 \begin_layout Standard
13901 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13903 Use Old Style Figures
13907 Use True Small Caps
13910 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13913 Use Old Style Figures
13915 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13917 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13925 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13929 Use True Small Caps
13931 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13932 of scaled capitals.
13933 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13934 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13935 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13939 \begin_layout Standard
13941 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13942 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13943 provided by the font package (or the
13947 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13952 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13958 \begin_layout Standard
13963 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13964 a font to display the script characters.
13968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13969 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13975 \begin_inset Index idx
13978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13985 So this has no effect for the document language
14001 \begin_layout Standard
14004 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14006 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14007 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14013 \begin_inset Index idx
14016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14018 packages ! microtype
14027 \begin_layout Standard
14030 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14032 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14037 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14038 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14044 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14045 \begin_inset space ~
14049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14051 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14061 \begin_layout Standard
14062 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14066 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14074 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14079 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14080 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14082 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14087 dialog, see section
14088 \begin_inset space ~
14092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14094 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14106 \begin_layout Subsection
14110 \begin_layout Standard
14111 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14112 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14114 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14115 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14116 choose a math font in the dialog
14118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14122 \begin_inset Index idx
14125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14126 Document ! Settings
14132 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14133 automatically selects a math font.
14134 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14135 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14144 \begin_inset space ~
14150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14155 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14156 document font is available.
14159 \begin_layout Standard
14160 Note that the math font will not be used for
14164 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14170 or by the insertion of the command
14177 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14178 \begin_inset space ~
14182 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14183 while the math characters do not.
14185 \begin_inset space ~
14188 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14191 \begin_inset space ~
14199 \begin_inset space ~
14204 in the document font settings.
14207 \begin_layout Standard
14208 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14209 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14210 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14211 font (in most cases
14212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14218 \begin_inset space ~
14224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14227 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14228 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14236 \begin_inset space ~
14242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14248 \begin_layout Subsection
14250 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14256 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14260 name "subsec:charstyles"
14267 \begin_inset Index idx
14270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14277 \begin_inset Index idx
14280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14289 \begin_layout Standard
14290 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14291 automatically changes the
14292 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14295 style for certain paragraph environments.
14297 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14298 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14300 This is where we meet the concept of
14306 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14308 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14312 \begin_layout Standard
14314 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14319 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14334 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14343 e., available with all document classes.
14344 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14348 for specific purposes.
14349 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14352 \begin_layout Standard
14354 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14355 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14365 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14369 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14382 — you customized the
14387 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14388 among them, encourage the use of
14400 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14401 \begin_inset space ~
14405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14407 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14412 Rather than fiddling with
14416 , they encourage the use of
14420 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14425 \begin_inset Quotes els
14429 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14432 ), not their form (
14433 \begin_inset Quotes els
14437 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14441 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14442 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14443 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14444 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14445 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14446 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14452 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14456 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14457 With a semantic markup (such as
14461 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14466 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14468 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14469 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14472 \begin_layout Standard
14474 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14475 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14476 by \SpecialChar LyX
14482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14484 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14485 Builtin Text Styles
14486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14488 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14495 \begin_layout Standard
14497 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14498 The two builtin text styles can be
14499 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14507 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14508 both of these styles
14511 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14519 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14525 \begin_layout Standard
14530 style, do one of the following:
14533 \begin_layout Itemize
14534 click on the toolbar button
14543 \begin_layout Itemize
14544 use the key binding
14551 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14555 \begin_layout Itemize
14557 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14565 arg "dialog-show character"
14571 arg "dialog-show character"
14574 ) as described in section
14575 \begin_inset space ~
14579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14581 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14590 \begin_layout Standard
14591 These commands are all toggles.
14596 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14599 \begin_layout Standard
14600 One typically uses the
14604 style for proper names.
14606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14613 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14619 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14623 \begin_layout Standard
14625 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14630 is producing text in
14634 , but the definition can be changed.
14639 \begin_layout Standard
14641 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14643 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14651 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14658 \begin_layout Itemize
14659 clicking on the toolbar button
14668 \begin_layout Itemize
14669 using the keybindings
14676 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14680 \begin_layout Itemize
14682 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14690 arg "dialog-show character"
14696 arg "dialog-show character"
14699 ) as described in section
14700 \begin_inset space ~
14704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14706 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14715 \begin_layout Standard
14720 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14722 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14724 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14727 packages use a different font
14728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14729 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14735 \begin_layout Standard
14736 We've been using the
14740 style all over the place in this document.
14741 Here's one more example:
14744 \begin_layout Quotation
14748 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14750 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14756 \begin_layout Standard
14757 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14758 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14759 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14760 the common tendency to overuse
14761 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14763 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14768 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14770 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14774 \begin_layout Standard
14776 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14777 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14778 only as font changes and integrated in the
14786 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14789 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14796 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14798 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14802 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14805 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14807 \begin_inset space ~
14810 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14812 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14818 arg "dialog-show character"
14824 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14826 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14832 arg "dialog-show character"
14836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14842 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14846 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14853 \begin_layout Standard
14855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14856 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14858 \begin_inset space ~
14862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14864 reference "subsec:Modules"
14871 ), or local layout settings (see section
14872 \begin_inset space ~
14876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14878 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14883 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14887 markup for specific functions.
14888 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14893 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14903 \begin_inset Quotes els
14907 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14913 \begin_layout Standard
14915 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14916 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14918 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14924 \begin_layout Standard
14926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14927 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14932 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14933 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14934 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14939 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14940 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14945 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14953 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14954 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14955 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14956 \begin_inset Flex Code
14959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14961 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14970 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14975 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14984 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14989 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14998 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14999 on screen their formal appearance.
15004 \begin_layout Subsection
15006 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15012 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15018 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15020 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15026 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15028 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15034 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15039 \begin_inset Index idx
15042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15051 \begin_layout Standard
15052 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15056 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15058 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15060 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15064 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15065 the properties of text passages
15066 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15070 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15071 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15072 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15073 from ordinary dialog.
15074 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15078 \begin_layout Standard
15080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15081 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15082 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15083 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15084 the properties of the respective text passages.
15089 comes in as a last resort.
15094 \begin_layout Standard
15095 Before we document how to
15096 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15097 use custom character style
15098 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15099 tweak the text properties
15101 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15102 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15104 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15108 \begin_inset Newline newline
15111 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15112 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15115 \begin_layout Standard
15117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15118 use custom character styles
15119 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15120 tweak text properties
15123 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15126 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15128 \begin_inset space ~
15131 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15139 arg "dialog-show character"
15144 dialog or press the toolbar button
15147 arg "dialog-show character"
15152 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15155 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15156 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15161 property that you can choose.
15162 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15165 \begin_inset space ~
15170 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15172 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15176 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15178 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15183 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15184 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15185 environments all at once.
15188 \begin_layout Standard
15190 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15192 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15195 properties, and their options (in addition to
15198 \begin_inset space ~
15204 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15208 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15216 \begin_layout Labeling
15217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15231 The possible options are:
15235 \begin_layout Labeling
15236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15241 This is the Roman font family.
15242 Normally a serif font.
15243 It's also the default family.
15253 \begin_layout Labeling
15254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15258 \begin_inset space ~
15265 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15277 \begin_layout Labeling
15278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15285 This is the Typewriter font family.
15291 arg "font-typewriter"
15297 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15301 \begin_layout Standard
15303 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15304 The general differences of these families are:
15307 \begin_layout Itemize
15309 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15314 fonts use characters with serifs.
15315 These are the small
15316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15323 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15324 The following example shows the difference:
15325 \begin_inset Newline newline
15329 \begin_inset Newline newline
15334 text without serifs
15337 \begin_inset Newline newline
15340 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15341 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15348 \begin_layout Itemize
15350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15355 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15356 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15357 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15360 \begin_layout Itemize
15362 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15375 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15393 \begin_inset Newline newline
15397 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15402 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15415 \begin_inset Note Note
15418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15420 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15421 For more on phantoms see section
15422 \begin_inset space ~
15426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15428 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15438 \begin_inset Newline newline
15447 \begin_layout Labeling
15448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15453 This corresponds to the print weight.
15458 \begin_layout Labeling
15459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15464 This is the Medium font series.
15465 It's also the default series.
15468 \begin_layout Labeling
15469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15476 This is the Bold font series.
15489 \begin_layout Labeling
15490 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15495 As the name implies.
15500 \begin_layout Labeling
15501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15506 This is the Upright font shape.
15507 It's also the default shape.
15510 \begin_layout Labeling
15511 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15521 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15526 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15531 s the Italic font shape
15537 \begin_layout Labeling
15538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15545 This is the Slanted font shape
15547 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15548 , this is different from italic).
15551 \begin_layout Labeling
15552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15556 \begin_inset space ~
15563 This is the Small caps font shape
15570 \begin_layout Labeling
15571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15576 Alters the text color.
15577 Note that not all DVI
15578 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15580 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15583 viewers are able to display colors.
15585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15589 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15591 \begin_inset space ~
15598 , which means that the document default color set in
15600 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15601 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15607 \begin_inset space ~
15613 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15615 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15619 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15699 \begin_inset Index idx
15702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15709 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15715 \begin_layout Labeling
15716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15721 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15722 the language of the document.
15723 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15725 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15728 in blue to indicate the change
15729 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15730 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15734 \begin_inset Newline newline
15737 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15739 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15740 When using the spell checking (see section
15741 \begin_inset space ~
15745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15747 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15751 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15752 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15754 \begin_inset Newline newline
15757 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15759 Exclude from Spellchecking
15762 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15765 \begin_layout Labeling
15766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15771 Alters the size of the font.
15773 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15775 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15779 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15782 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15783 document font size.
15784 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15785 the details, but a general description of what
15791 \begin_layout Labeling
15792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15813 arg "font-size tiny"
15819 \begin_layout Labeling
15820 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15841 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15847 \begin_layout Labeling
15848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15869 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15875 \begin_layout Labeling
15876 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15897 arg "font-size small"
15903 \begin_layout Labeling
15904 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15918 It's also the default size.
15922 arg "font-size normal"
15928 \begin_layout Labeling
15929 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15950 arg "font-size large"
15956 \begin_layout Labeling
15957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15978 arg "font-size larger"
15984 \begin_layout Labeling
15985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16006 arg "font-size largest"
16012 \begin_layout Labeling
16013 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16034 arg "font-size huge"
16040 \begin_layout Labeling
16041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16062 arg "font-size giant"
16068 \begin_layout Labeling
16069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16074 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16094 arg "font-size increase"
16100 \begin_layout Labeling
16101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16106 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16126 arg "font-size decrease"
16133 \begin_layout Standard
16138 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16139 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16141 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16142 — use those instead.
16143 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16146 \begin_layout Labeling
16147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16149 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16159 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16160 change a few other things at the character level
16161 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16162 have text passages being underlined
16166 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16167 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16168 days, when you could not change fonts.
16169 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16170 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16171 because some people
16175 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16182 \begin_layout Labeling
16183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16185 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16192 This is text with emphasize on
16195 This might seem like the same as
16199 , but it is actually a bit different.
16205 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16207 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16208 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16212 \begin_layout Labeling
16213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16215 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16220 Don't use underlining.
16225 \begin_layout Labeling
16226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16228 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16232 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16240 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16242 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16251 arg "font-underline"
16257 \begin_inset Newline newline
16261 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16264 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16265 when you could not change fonts.
16266 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16267 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16268 because some people
16272 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16277 \begin_layout Labeling
16278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16282 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16284 \begin_inset space ~
16293 This is text with Double under
16294 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16296 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16305 arg "font-underunderline"
16309 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16311 \begin_inset Newline newline
16314 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16315 about double underbar
16320 \begin_layout Labeling
16321 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16325 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16327 \begin_inset space ~
16336 This is text with Wavy under
16337 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16339 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16348 arg "font-underwave"
16352 \begin_inset Newline newline
16355 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16356 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16362 \begin_layout Labeling
16363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16365 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16370 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16376 \begin_layout Labeling
16377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16379 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16384 Don't use strikethrough.
16387 \begin_layout Labeling
16388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16392 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16394 \begin_inset space ~
16398 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16406 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16408 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16409 Single strikethrough
16417 arg "font-strikeout"
16421 \begin_inset Newline newline
16424 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16425 changed in the meantime.
16428 \begin_layout Labeling
16429 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16431 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16435 \begin_inset space ~
16439 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16441 \begin_inset space ~
16445 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16453 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16455 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16461 \begin_inset Newline newline
16464 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16468 \begin_layout Standard
16470 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16471 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16472 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16473 \begin_inset space ~
16477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16479 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16486 \begin_layout Itemize
16488 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16495 This is text with emphasize on
16500 \begin_layout Itemize
16504 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16511 This is text with Noun on.
16513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16520 , this is a logical attribute.
16521 Normally it's equivalent to
16524 \begin_inset space ~
16534 \begin_layout Standard
16535 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16536 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16538 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16543 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16544 chosen a new character style
16545 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16546 applied a text property
16549 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16552 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16554 \begin_inset space ~
16557 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16559 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16565 arg "dialog-show character"
16573 arg "dialog-show character"
16576 ) dialog, the settings are
16577 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16581 You can activate the
16582 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16585 last applied properties
16587 by using the toolbar button
16590 arg "textstyle-apply"
16594 The button lets you apply
16595 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16596 your custom character style
16597 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16600 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16602 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16603 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16604 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16605 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16610 \begin_layout Standard
16611 To completely reset the
16612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16614 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16615 text properties of a selection
16617 to the default, use
16618 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16620 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16630 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16635 from the menu of the toolbar button
16638 arg "textstyle-apply"
16645 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16646 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16647 you just set the shape to
16648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16666 \begin_inset space ~
16680 \begin_layout Standard
16682 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16683 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16691 \begin_inset space ~
16703 \begin_layout Itemize
16705 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16718 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16736 \begin_inset Newline newline
16740 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16754 \begin_inset Note Note
16757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16758 For more on phantoms see section
16759 \begin_inset space ~
16763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16765 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16775 \begin_inset Newline newline
16781 \begin_layout Itemize
16783 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16788 fonts use characters with serifs.
16789 These are the small
16790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16797 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16798 The following example shows the difference:
16799 \begin_inset Newline newline
16803 \begin_inset Newline newline
16808 text without serifs
16811 \begin_inset Newline newline
16814 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16815 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16822 \begin_layout Itemize
16824 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16829 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16830 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16831 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16836 \begin_layout Standard
16838 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16846 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16847 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16850 \begin_inset space ~
16855 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16856 the property to be removed.
16857 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16858 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16859 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16877 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16878 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16886 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16890 \begin_inset space ~
16895 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16906 If you, for example, set
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16925 \begin_inset space ~
16930 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16939 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16944 \begin_layout Standard
16946 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16949 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16950 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16953 \begin_layout Section
16954 Printing and Previewing
16957 \begin_layout Subsection
16961 \begin_layout Standard
16962 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16963 using \SpecialChar LyX
16964 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16965 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16966 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16967 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16969 Additional Features
16974 \begin_layout Standard
16976 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16979 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16980 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16981 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16984 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16985 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16986 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16987 to turn your writing into printable output.
16988 This happens in two stages:
16991 \begin_layout Enumerate
16992 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16993 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16995 a file with the extension,
16996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17010 \begin_layout Enumerate
17011 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17012 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17013 to use the commands in the
17017 file to produce printable output.
17020 \begin_layout Subsection
17021 Output file formats
17022 \begin_inset Index idx
17025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17034 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17043 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17045 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17049 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17053 \begin_inset Index idx
17056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17058 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17060 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17071 \begin_layout Standard
17072 This file type has the extension
17073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17085 It contains your document as plain text
17086 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17088 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17089 following the rules of the
17090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17093 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17102 \begin_layout Standard
17103 You can export your document to
17104 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17106 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17111 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17112 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17114 \begin_inset space ~
17120 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17121 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17122 bibliography (section
17123 \begin_inset space ~
17127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17129 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17134 If your document includes such material, use
17136 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17137 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17139 \begin_inset space ~
17143 \begin_inset space ~
17147 \begin_inset space ~
17155 \begin_inset space ~
17159 \begin_inset space ~
17165 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17166 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17167 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17169 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17178 \begin_inset Index idx
17181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17182 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17191 \begin_layout Standard
17192 This file type has the extension
17193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17204 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17207 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17208 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17209 -Errors or to process it manually
17210 with console commands.
17211 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17212 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17213 's temporary directory whenever you
17214 view or export your document.
17217 \begin_layout Standard
17218 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17219 -file using the menu
17221 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17222 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17226 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17227 export variants are explained in section
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17234 reference "subsec:Export"
17241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17243 \begin_inset Index idx
17246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17255 \begin_layout Standard
17256 This file type has the extension
17257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17277 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17278 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17279 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17283 \begin_layout Standard
17284 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17285 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17286 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17287 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17288 when you view the DVI.
17289 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17292 \begin_layout Standard
17293 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17295 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17296 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17301 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17302 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17304 \begin_inset space ~
17310 The latter option uses the program
17312 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17318 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17321 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17322 font access (see section
17323 \begin_inset space ~
17327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17329 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17334 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17335 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17342 \begin_inset Index idx
17345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17346 File formats ! PostScript
17354 \begin_layout Standard
17355 This file type has the extension
17356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17368 PostScript was developed by the company
17372 as a printer language.
17373 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17375 PostScript can be seen as a
17376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17379 programming language
17380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17383 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17388 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17395 \begin_inset Index idx
17398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17400 packages ! pstricks
17410 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17413 \begin_layout Standard
17414 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17418 Encapsulated PostScript
17419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17422 (EPS, file extension
17423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17435 As \SpecialChar LyX
17436 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17437 convert them in the background to EPS.
17438 If, for example, you have 50
17439 \begin_inset space ~
17442 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17444 \begin_inset space ~
17447 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17448 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17450 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17451 EPS to avoid this problem.
17454 \begin_layout Standard
17455 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17457 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17458 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17466 \begin_inset Index idx
17469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17476 \begin_inset Index idx
17479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17488 \begin_layout Standard
17489 This file type has the extension
17490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17506 Portable Document Format
17507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17514 was derived from PostScript.
17515 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17524 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17525 looks exactly the same.
17528 \begin_layout Standard
17529 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17533 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17537 (JPG, file extension
17538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17565 Portable Network Graphics
17566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17569 (PNG, file extension
17570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17582 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17583 converts them in the
17584 background to one of these formats.
17585 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17586 will slow down your workflow.
17587 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17590 \begin_layout Standard
17591 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17593 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17599 \begin_layout Description
17601 \begin_inset space ~
17604 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17608 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17611 \begin_layout Description
17613 \begin_inset space ~
17620 ) This uses the program
17622 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17625 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17628 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17631 is a new engine, derived from
17635 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17636 access (see section
17637 \begin_inset space ~
17641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17643 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17648 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17649 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17654 \begin_layout Description
17656 \begin_inset space ~
17663 ) This uses the program
17668 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17674 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17675 font access (see section
17676 \begin_inset space ~
17680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17682 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17687 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17688 vertically written Japanese.
17691 \begin_layout Description
17693 \begin_inset space ~
17696 (cropped) This is the same as
17699 \begin_inset space ~
17704 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17705 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17706 to generate good-looking
17707 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17710 \begin_layout Description
17712 \begin_inset space ~
17715 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17719 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17723 \begin_layout Description
17725 \begin_inset space ~
17728 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17732 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17733 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17737 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17738 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17741 \begin_layout Standard
17745 \begin_inset space ~
17754 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17755 works without problems.
17756 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17757 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17761 \begin_inset space ~
17769 \begin_inset space ~
17774 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17784 \begin_inset Index idx
17787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17788 FileFormats ! XHTML
17794 \begin_inset Index idx
17797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17806 \begin_layout Standard
17807 This file type has the extension
17808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17820 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17821 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17822 When \SpecialChar LyX
17823 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17824 suitable for the purpose.
17825 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17828 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17831 between different formats, which are described in section
17833 Math Output in XHTML
17838 \begin_inset space ~
17846 \begin_layout Standard
17847 XHTML output remains
17848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17855 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17856 features are supported yet.
17860 and the World Wide Web
17864 Additional Features
17866 manual, for more information.
17869 \begin_layout Standard
17870 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17872 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17873 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17879 \begin_layout Subsection
17881 \begin_inset Index idx
17884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17893 \begin_layout Standard
17894 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17895 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17904 or use the toolbar button
17911 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17912 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17913 \begin_inset space ~
17917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17919 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17923 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17925 \begin_inset space ~
17929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17931 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17936 Further output formats can be selected via
17938 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17939 View (Other Formats)
17941 or the toolbar button
17950 \begin_layout Standard
17951 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17952 viewer window using the menu
17954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17960 Update (Other Formats)
17965 \begin_layout Standard
17966 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17969 To have a real output, export your document.
17972 \begin_layout Section
17973 A few Words about Typography
17974 \begin_inset Index idx
17977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17986 \begin_layout Subsection
17987 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17988 \begin_inset Index idx
17991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17998 \begin_inset Index idx
18001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18010 \begin_layout Standard
18011 In \SpecialChar LyX
18013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18024 symbol comes in four variants: the
18041 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18047 \begin_layout Standard
18048 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18058 height_special "totalheight"
18063 backgroundcolor "none"
18066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18067 \begin_inset Tabular
18068 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18069 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18070 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18071 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18072 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18073 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18102 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18142 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18165 system key combination
18169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18170 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18182 and the em dash with
18185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18198 is the Mac label for the right
18208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18221 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18222 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18244 system key combination or
18245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18259 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18272 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18311 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18317 \begin_layout Standard
18318 Dashes can also be inserted with
18320 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18322 \begin_inset space ~
18325 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18333 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18334 and 2014 for the en dash).
18337 \begin_layout Standard
18338 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18339 mode and has a length of its own.
18340 Here are some examples:
18343 \begin_layout Enumerate
18344 line- and page-breaks
18345 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18355 \begin_layout Enumerate
18357 \begin_inset space ~
18361 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18371 \begin_layout Enumerate
18372 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18383 \begin_layout Enumerate
18384 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18388 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18398 \begin_layout Standard
18400 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18402 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18403 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18411 \begin_layout Subsection
18412 Dashes and Line Breaks
18413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18415 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18422 \begin_layout Standard
18423 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18424 case and locale, e.
18425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18431 \begin_layout Itemize
18432 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18433 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18436 \begin_layout Itemize
18437 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18441 \begin_layout Itemize
18442 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18443 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18446 \begin_layout Standard
18447 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18448 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18459 allows line breaks after hyphens
18460 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18462 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18465 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18468 \begin_layout Enumerate
18469 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18470 \begin_inset space ~
18473 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18475 The Elements of Typographic Style
18478 \begin_inset space ~
18481 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18484 \begin_layout Enumerate
18485 Unwanted line breaks
18490 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18492 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18495 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18502 Prevent Hyphenation
18507 \begin_inset space ~
18523 in \SpecialChar TeX
18525 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18526 , a protected space does not suffice
18530 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18537 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18538 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18539 in the document language.
18540 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18554 \begin_layout Itemize
18556 \begin_inset space ~
18560 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18570 height_special "totalheight"
18575 backgroundcolor "none"
18578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18587 \begin_layout Itemize
18589 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18599 height_special "totalheight"
18604 backgroundcolor "none"
18607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18609 \begin_inset space ~
18617 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18618 \begin_inset space ~
18621 – sont très utiles.
18624 \begin_layout Itemize
18629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18638 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18642 \begin_layout Standard
18643 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18644 \begin_inset space ~
18647 – in contrast to an overfull line
18648 \begin_inset space ~
18651 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18655 \begin_layout Standard
18656 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18660 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18661 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18662 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18667 \begin_layout Enumerate
18668 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18669 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18670 or \SpecialChar TeX
18676 \begin_layout Itemize
18678 \begin_inset space ~
18681 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18682 \begin_inset space ~
18685 – sont très utiles.
18689 \begin_layout Enumerate
18690 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18691 \begin_inset Newline newline
18696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18697 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18699 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18701 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18703 \begin_inset space ~
18709 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18711 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18713 \begin_inset space ~
18724 \begin_layout Itemize
18725 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18726 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18727 should be followed by
18728 a line break opportunity.
18731 \begin_layout Standard
18732 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18733 \begin_inset space ~
18737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18739 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18750 \begin_layout Enumerate
18751 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18752 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18753 or en dashes (see section
18754 \begin_inset space ~
18758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18760 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18771 Changes and backwards compatibility
18774 \begin_layout Standard
18775 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18777 \begin_inset space ~
18780 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18781 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18790 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18791 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18799 \begin_layout Standard
18800 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18802 \begin_inset space ~
18805 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18807 prevents ligation to dashes.
18809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18816 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18821 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18822 after the input (unless the current text font is
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 The behavior was changed since
18832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18847 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18848 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18849 as non-breakable dashes.
18850 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18858 \begin_layout Standard
18861 \begin_inset space ~
18869 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18871 \begin_inset space ~
18874 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18878 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18879 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18880 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18882 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18886 If you used both literal and
18887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18894 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18896 \begin_inset space ~
18899 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18900 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18903 \begin_layout Subsection
18905 \begin_inset Index idx
18908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18917 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18924 \begin_layout Standard
18925 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18926 but automatically in the output.
18927 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18933 \begin_inset Index idx
18936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18943 following the rules of the document language.
18945 does not hyphenate text in the
18949 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18952 \begin_layout Standard
18954 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18958 font and with unusual constructs, like
18959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18967 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18968 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18969 This is done with the menu
18971 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18972 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18974 \begin_inset space ~
18980 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18982 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18986 \begin_layout Standard
18987 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18988 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18999 would then see the hyphen
19000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19007 as a line break possibility.
19008 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19009 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19013 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19016 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19018 Prevent Hyphenation
19023 \begin_inset space ~
19031 \begin_layout Subsection
19033 \begin_inset Index idx
19036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19045 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19046 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19049 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19056 \begin_layout Standard
19057 When \SpecialChar LyX
19058 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19059 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19061 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19067 appropriate amount of space.
19068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19071 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19073 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19074 gets after another word.
19077 \begin_layout Standard
19078 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19079 not work in all cases.
19081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19092 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19093 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19096 \begin_layout Standard
19097 Here are some examples of
19101 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19104 \begin_layout Itemize
19109 \begin_layout Itemize
19114 \begin_layout Standard
19115 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19118 \begin_layout Itemize
19120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19124 this is too much space!
19127 \begin_layout Itemize
19132 \begin_layout Standard
19133 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19136 \begin_layout Standard
19137 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19140 \begin_layout Enumerate
19144 \begin_inset space ~
19149 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19150 \begin_inset space ~
19154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19156 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19161 \begin_inset Index idx
19164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19165 Spaces ! inter-word
19173 \begin_layout Enumerate
19177 \begin_inset space ~
19182 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19183 \begin_inset space ~
19187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19189 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19194 \begin_inset Index idx
19197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19206 \begin_layout Enumerate
19210 \begin_inset space ~
19214 \begin_inset space ~
19218 \begin_inset space ~
19225 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19227 \begin_inset space ~
19232 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19233 This function is also bound to
19236 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19242 \begin_layout Standard
19243 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19246 \begin_layout Itemize
19248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19252 \begin_inset space \space{}
19255 this is too much space!
19258 \begin_layout Itemize
19259 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19263 \begin_layout Standard
19264 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19265 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19267 will take care of this.
19270 \begin_layout Standard
19271 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19275 \begin_inset space ~
19281 feature described in the section
19283 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19288 Additional Features
19293 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19295 \begin_inset Index idx
19298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19299 Typography ! Quotation marks
19305 \begin_inset Index idx
19308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19309 Quotation marks | see
19313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19339 \begin_layout Standard
19341 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19342 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19343 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19353 The keyboard character,
19357 , generates this automatically.
19360 \begin_layout Standard
19361 You can specify what character the
19365 key produces by using the submenu
19371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19375 \begin_inset Index idx
19378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 Document ! Settings
19384 dialog and switching the
19388 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19389 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19391 \begin_inset space ~
19397 \begin_layout Labeling
19398 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19410 \begin_inset space ~
19414 \begin_inset space ~
19418 \begin_inset Quotes els
19422 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19436 \begin_inset Quotes els
19440 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19443 quotation marks (as common, e.
19444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19450 \begin_layout Labeling
19451 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19454 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19458 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19462 \begin_inset space ~
19466 \begin_inset space ~
19470 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19474 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19480 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19484 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19488 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19492 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19495 quotation marks (as common, e.
19496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19502 \begin_layout Labeling
19503 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19506 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19510 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19514 \begin_inset space ~
19518 \begin_inset space ~
19522 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19526 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19532 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19536 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19540 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19544 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19547 quotation marks (as common, e.
19548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19554 \begin_layout Labeling
19555 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19558 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19562 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19566 \begin_inset space ~
19570 \begin_inset space ~
19574 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19578 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19584 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19588 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19592 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19596 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19599 quotation marks (as common, e.
19600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19606 \begin_layout Labeling
19607 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19610 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19614 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19618 \begin_inset space ~
19622 \begin_inset space ~
19626 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19630 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19636 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19640 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19644 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19648 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19651 quotation marks (as common, e.
19652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19655 g., in Switzerland)
19658 \begin_layout Labeling
19659 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19662 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19666 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19670 \begin_inset space ~
19674 \begin_inset space ~
19678 \begin_inset Quotes als
19682 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19688 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19692 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19696 \begin_inset Quotes als
19700 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19703 quotation marks (as common, e.
19704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19710 \begin_layout Labeling
19711 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19714 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19718 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19722 \begin_inset space ~
19726 \begin_inset space ~
19730 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19734 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19740 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19744 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19748 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19752 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19755 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19758 \begin_layout Labeling
19759 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19762 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19766 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19770 \begin_inset space ~
19774 \begin_inset space ~
19778 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19782 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19788 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19792 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19796 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19800 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19803 quotation marks (as common, e.
19804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19807 g., in Great Britain)
19810 \begin_layout Labeling
19811 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19814 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19818 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19822 \begin_inset space ~
19826 \begin_inset space ~
19830 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19834 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19840 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19844 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19848 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19852 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19855 quotation marks (as common, e.
19856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19862 \begin_layout Labeling
19863 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19866 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19870 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19874 \begin_inset space ~
19878 \begin_inset space ~
19882 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19886 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19892 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19896 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19900 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19904 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19907 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19912 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19913 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19914 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19915 the inner marks differ).
19923 \begin_layout Labeling
19924 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19927 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19931 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19935 \begin_inset space ~
19939 \begin_inset space ~
19943 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19947 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19953 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19957 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19961 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19965 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19968 quotation marks (as common, e.
19969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19975 \begin_layout Labeling
19976 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19979 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19983 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19987 \begin_inset space ~
19991 \begin_inset space ~
19995 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19999 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20005 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20009 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20013 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20017 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20020 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20023 \begin_layout Labeling
20024 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20025 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20033 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20039 \begin_inset space ~
20043 \begin_inset space ~
20049 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20057 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20061 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20065 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20069 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20073 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20076 quotation marks (as common, e.
20077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20089 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20095 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20096 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20104 \begin_layout Labeling
20105 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20106 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20114 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20120 \begin_inset space ~
20124 \begin_inset space ~
20130 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20138 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20142 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20146 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20150 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20154 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20157 quotation marks (as common, e.
20158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20161 g., in North Korea and China)
20162 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20164 \begin_inset script superscript
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20171 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20186 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20193 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20203 \begin_layout Standard
20204 Inner quotation marks
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20210 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20211 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20219 does not necessarily mean
20220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20228 This is why we call them
20229 \begin_inset Quotes els
20233 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20249 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20251 \begin_inset Quotes els
20255 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20258 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20261 arg "quote-insert inner"
20266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20272 \begin_layout Standard
20273 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20274 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20275 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20276 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20277 If you check the setting
20279 Use dynamic quotation marks
20283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20284 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20287 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20288 they appear in a special color).
20289 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20290 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20295 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20298 \begin_layout Standard
20299 Individual quotation marks (i.
20300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20303 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20304 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20308 \begin_layout Subsection
20310 \begin_inset Index idx
20313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 Typography ! Ligatures
20320 \begin_inset Index idx
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20354 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20361 \begin_layout Standard
20362 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20363 print them as single characters.
20364 These groups are known as
20369 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20370 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20372 Here are the standard ligatures:
20375 \begin_layout Itemize
20379 \begin_layout Itemize
20383 \begin_layout Itemize
20387 \begin_layout Itemize
20391 \begin_layout Itemize
20395 \begin_layout Standard
20396 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20399 \begin_layout Standard
20400 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20401 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20409 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20425 To break a ligature, use
20427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20428 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20430 \begin_inset space ~
20437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20448 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20465 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20473 \begin_layout Subsection
20475 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20477 \begin_inset Index idx
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20490 \begin_layout Standard
20493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20494 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20498 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20501 \begin_layout Description
20503 The name of the game.
20506 \begin_layout Description
20508 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20512 \begin_layout Description
20514 The \SpecialChar TeX
20515 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20519 \begin_layout Description
20520 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20521 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20525 \begin_layout Standard
20526 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20532 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20540 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20541 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20542 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20543 converges to the number
20544 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20547 : The actual version is
20548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20556 , the previous one was
20557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20568 \begin_layout Subsection
20570 \begin_inset Index idx
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 \begin_layout Standard
20583 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20584 space between two words.
20585 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20595 for units use the menu
20597 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20598 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20600 \begin_inset space ~
20608 arg "space-insert thin"
20614 \begin_layout Standard
20615 Here is an example to show the differences:
20618 \begin_layout Standard
20619 \begin_inset Tabular
20620 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20621 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20622 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20623 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 \begin_inset space ~
20634 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 space between number and unit
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20662 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20674 half space between number and unit
20687 \begin_layout Subsection
20689 \begin_inset Index idx
20692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20701 \begin_layout Standard
20702 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20704 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20705 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20706 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20707 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20708 These bits of text became known as
20719 \begin_layout Standard
20720 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20721 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20722 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20723 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20724 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20725 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20726 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20727 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20728 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20729 \begin_inset Newline newline
20737 \begin_inset Newline newline
20745 \begin_inset Newline newline
20748 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20749 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20750 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20752 \begin_inset space ~
20756 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20758 key "latexcompanion"
20764 \begin_inset space ~
20768 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20775 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20776 's page break mechanism.
20779 \begin_layout Chapter
20780 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20783 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20790 \begin_layout Standard
20791 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20794 \begin_inset space ~
20800 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20803 \begin_layout Section
20805 \begin_inset Index idx
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20824 \begin_layout Standard
20826 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20829 \begin_layout Description
20832 \begin_inset space ~
20835 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20836 \begin_inset Newline newline
20840 \begin_inset Note Note
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20844 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20852 \begin_layout Description
20853 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20854 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20855 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20858 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20859 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20861 \begin_inset space ~
20867 \begin_inset Newline newline
20871 \begin_inset Note Comment
20874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20875 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20884 \begin_layout Description
20886 \begin_inset space ~
20889 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20890 set in the document settings under
20892 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20894 \begin_inset space ~
20900 \begin_inset Newline newline
20904 \begin_inset Newline newline
20908 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20917 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20918 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20923 of a comment that appears in the output.
20929 \begin_inset Newline newline
20933 \begin_inset Newline newline
20936 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20939 \begin_layout Standard
20940 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20952 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20955 \begin_layout Section
20957 \begin_inset Index idx
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20969 name "sec:Footnotes"
20976 \begin_layout Standard
20978 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20984 or the toolbar button
20987 arg "footnote-insert"
20999 \begin_inset Graphics
21000 filename clipart/footnote.png
21009 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21010 's representation of your footnote.
21020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21039 label, the box will
21043 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21044 Clicking on the box label again will close
21057 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21058 and click on the footnote
21073 \begin_layout Standard
21074 Here is an example footnote:
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21083 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21091 \begin_layout Standard
21092 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21093 position where the footnote box is placed.
21094 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21095 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21096 according to the document class.
21098 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21099 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21105 ey are described in the
21108 \begin_inset space ~
21116 \begin_layout Section
21118 \begin_inset Index idx
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21130 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21137 \begin_layout Standard
21138 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21140 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21144 \begin_inset space ~
21149 or the toolbar button
21152 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21178 appearing within your text.
21179 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21180 's representation of your margin
21189 \begin_layout Standard
21190 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21194 \begin_inset Marginal
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 This is a marginal note.
21207 \begin_layout Standard
21208 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21209 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21210 pages, right on odd pages.
21213 \begin_layout Standard
21214 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21217 \begin_inset space ~
21225 \begin_inset space ~
21233 \begin_layout Section
21234 Graphics and Images
21235 \begin_inset Index idx
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 \begin_inset Index idx
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21257 name "sec:Graphics"
21264 \begin_layout Standard
21265 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21266 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21269 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21278 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21281 \begin_layout Standard
21282 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21287 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21288 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21290 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21291 \begin_inset space ~
21295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21297 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21304 \begin_layout Standard
21309 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21310 of the image in the output.
21311 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21315 \begin_inset space ~
21319 \begin_inset space ~
21328 \begin_inset space ~
21332 \begin_inset space ~
21336 \begin_inset space ~
21341 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21342 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21350 \begin_layout Standard
21354 \begin_inset space ~
21358 \begin_inset space ~
21363 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21364 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21366 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21371 \begin_inset space ~
21376 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21377 with the image size is printed.
21380 \begin_layout Standard
21381 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21382 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21384 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21387 \begin_layout Standard
21389 \begin_inset Graphics
21390 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21398 \begin_layout Standard
21399 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21400 the image into a float, see section
21401 \begin_inset space ~
21405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21407 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21414 \begin_layout Subsection
21416 \begin_inset Index idx
21419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21428 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21435 \begin_layout Standard
21436 You can insert images in any known file format.
21437 But as we explained in section
21438 \begin_inset space ~
21442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21444 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21448 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21450 therefore uses the program
21454 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21455 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21456 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21457 \begin_inset space ~
21461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21463 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21470 \begin_layout Standard
21471 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21474 \begin_layout Description
21476 \begin_inset space ~
21479 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21480 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21481 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21485 Graphics Interchange Format
21486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21489 (GIF, file extension
21490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21502 \begin_inset Index idx
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21537 Portable Network Graphics
21538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21541 (PNG, file extension
21542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21554 \begin_inset Index idx
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21589 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21593 (JPG, file extension
21594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21618 \begin_inset Index idx
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21652 \begin_layout Description
21654 \begin_inset space ~
21657 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21659 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21660 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21661 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21662 \begin_inset Newline newline
21665 Scalable image formats can be
21666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21669 Scalable Vector Graphics
21670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21673 (SVG, file extension
21674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21686 \begin_inset Index idx
21689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21721 Encapsulated PostScript
21722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21725 (EPS, file extension
21726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21738 \begin_inset Index idx
21741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21773 Portable Document Format
21774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21777 (PDF, file extension
21778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21790 \begin_inset Index idx
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21808 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21809 result will not be scalable.
21810 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21816 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21824 \begin_layout Standard
21825 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21832 \begin_layout Subsection
21833 Grouping of Image Settings
21834 \begin_inset Index idx
21837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 Images ! Settings grouping
21846 \begin_layout Standard
21847 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21849 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21850 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21852 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21853 need to manually change each of them.
21856 \begin_layout Standard
21857 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21860 \begin_inset space ~
21864 \begin_inset space ~
21876 \begin_inset space ~
21880 \begin_inset space ~
21886 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21887 and checking the name of the desired group.
21890 \begin_layout Section
21892 \begin_inset Index idx
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21911 \begin_layout Standard
21912 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21915 arg "tabular-insert"
21920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21924 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21925 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21926 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21929 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21930 from the rest of the table.
21931 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21932 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21934 Here is an example table:
21937 \begin_layout Standard
21939 \begin_inset Tabular
21940 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21941 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21942 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22143 \begin_layout Standard
22145 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22146 This corresponds to the
22147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22154 table style listed in the style selection.
22157 \begin_layout Standard
22159 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22160 Other available styles include:
22163 \begin_layout Itemize
22165 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22174 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22178 \begin_layout Itemize
22180 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22181 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22184 \begin_layout Itemize
22186 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22195 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22196 bold top/bottom lines (see
22207 \begin_layout Standard
22209 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22210 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22211 button can be changed in
22213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22214 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22218 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22222 \begin_layout Subsection
22226 \begin_layout Standard
22227 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22230 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22234 This brings up the table dialog.
22235 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22236 cursor is placed currently.
22237 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22238 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22239 done on all of your selection.
22242 \begin_layout Standard
22243 In addition to the table dialog, the
22246 \begin_inset space ~
22251 helps you in setting table properties.
22252 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22255 \begin_layout Standard
22259 \begin_inset space ~
22264 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22265 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22266 current cell respectively.
22267 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22269 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22270 of text, see section
22271 \begin_inset space ~
22275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22277 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22284 \begin_layout Standard
22285 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22286 using the check box
22295 This will merge the cells to
22299 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22300 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22301 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22302 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22303 in the last row without the upper border:
22306 \begin_layout Standard
22308 \begin_inset Tabular
22309 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22310 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22311 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22312 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22313 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22314 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22325 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22445 \begin_layout Standard
22446 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22447 -arguments for the table.
22448 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22449 explained in the chapter
22456 \begin_inset space ~
22462 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22463 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22464 but are visible in the output.
22467 \begin_layout Standard
22468 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22476 Most DVI-viewers are
22480 able to display rotations.
22488 \begin_layout Standard
22493 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22498 adds lines for all cell borders.
22501 \begin_layout Subsection
22503 \begin_inset Index idx
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22507 Tables ! Multi-page
22513 \begin_inset Index idx
22516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 \begin_layout Standard
22526 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22529 \begin_inset space ~
22533 \begin_inset space ~
22541 \begin_inset space ~
22546 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22547 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22550 \begin_layout Description
22555 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22556 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22557 Except for the first page, if
22560 \begin_inset space ~
22568 \begin_layout Description
22572 \begin_inset space ~
22577 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22578 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22581 \begin_layout Description
22586 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22587 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22588 except for the last page, if
22591 \begin_inset space ~
22599 \begin_layout Description
22603 \begin_inset space ~
22608 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22609 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22612 \begin_layout Description
22613 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22614 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22620 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22623 \begin_inset space ~
22631 \begin_layout Standard
22632 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22633 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22634 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22640 In this context, first means first in this order:
22643 \begin_inset space ~
22655 \begin_inset space ~
22660 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22663 \begin_layout Standard
22665 \begin_inset Tabular
22666 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22667 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22668 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22669 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22670 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22671 <row endfirsthead="true">
22672 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22678 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22683 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22702 <row endfirsthead="true">
22703 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22714 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22735 <row endhead="true">
22736 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22766 <row endhead="true">
22767 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 <row endfoot="true">
22800 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22811 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23821 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24286 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24317 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24348 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24410 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24503 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24534 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24565 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24596 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24627 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24658 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24689 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24720 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24781 <row endlastfoot="true">
24782 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24793 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24802 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24819 \begin_layout Subsection
24821 \begin_inset Index idx
24824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24833 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24840 \begin_layout Standard
24841 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24842 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24843 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24844 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24848 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24851 \begin_layout Standard
24852 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24853 for the column in the table dialog.
24854 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24855 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24859 \begin_layout Standard
24861 \begin_inset Tabular
24862 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24863 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24864 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24865 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24866 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24886 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24955 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25011 This is longer now.
25016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25067 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25068 This is longer now.
25073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 \begin_layout Standard
25100 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25101 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25106 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25107 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25112 Selection with the mouse or with
25116 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25117 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25118 the selection from outside the table.
25121 \begin_layout Section
25123 \begin_inset Index idx
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25142 \begin_layout Subsection
25146 \begin_layout Standard
25147 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25148 have a fixed location.
25150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25157 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25165 \begin_inset space ~
25170 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25171 too many notes on the current page.
25174 \begin_layout Standard
25175 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25176 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25177 and pages without text.
25178 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25179 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25180 Floats are therefore numbered.
25181 Referencing is described in section
25182 \begin_inset space ~
25186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25188 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25195 \begin_layout Standard
25196 To insert a float, use the menu
25198 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25202 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25203 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25205 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25206 \begin_inset Index idx
25209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25215 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25216 paragraph within the float.
25217 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25218 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25219 left-clicking on the box label.
25220 A closed float box looks like this:
25221 \begin_inset Graphics
25222 filename clipart/float.png
25227 – a gray button with a red label.
25230 \begin_layout Standard
25231 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25233 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25236 \begin_layout Subsection
25238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25240 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25245 \begin_inset Index idx
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 Floats ! Figure floats
25257 \begin_layout Standard
25259 \begin_inset space ~
25263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25265 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25269 was created using the menu
25271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25272 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25278 arg "float-insert figure"
25282 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25285 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25291 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25295 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25296 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25298 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25300 \begin_inset space ~
25308 arg "layout-paragraph"
25314 \begin_layout Standard
25315 \begin_inset Float figure
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 \begin_inset Graphics
25325 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25335 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25340 name "fig:A-star-in"
25357 \begin_layout Standard
25358 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25359 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25370 ) and refer to it using the menu
25372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25378 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25382 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25383 vague references like
25384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25391 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25392 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25402 For more about cross-references, see section
25403 \begin_inset space ~
25407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25409 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25416 \begin_layout Standard
25417 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25418 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25419 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25420 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25421 as described in section
25422 \begin_inset space ~
25426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25428 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25434 \begin_inset space ~
25438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25440 reference "fig:Two-images"
25444 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25445 You can also set the images one below the other.
25447 \begin_inset space ~
25451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25453 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25460 reference "fig:Star"
25464 are the subfigures.
25467 \begin_layout Standard
25468 \begin_inset Float figure
25475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25476 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25480 \begin_inset Float figure
25487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25493 name "fig:Undefinable"
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25506 \begin_inset Graphics
25507 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25519 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25523 \begin_inset Float figure
25530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25549 \begin_inset Graphics
25550 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25562 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25569 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25574 name "fig:Two-images"
25591 \begin_layout Subsection
25593 \begin_inset Index idx
25596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25597 Floats ! Table floats
25605 \begin_layout Standard
25606 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25609 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25612 or the toolbar button
25615 arg "float-insert table"
25619 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25620 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25621 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25623 \begin_inset space ~
25627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25629 reference "tab:Table-float"
25636 \begin_layout Standard
25637 \begin_inset Float table
25644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25645 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25650 name "tab:Table-float"
25662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25664 \begin_inset Tabular
25665 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25666 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25667 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25668 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25669 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25796 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25817 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25820 \end{array}\right]$
25828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25841 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25862 \begin_layout Subsection
25864 \begin_inset Index idx
25867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25876 \begin_layout Standard
25878 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25879 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25880 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25882 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25890 \begin_inset space ~
25898 \begin_layout Section
25900 \begin_inset Index idx
25903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25912 \begin_layout Standard
25914 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25916 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25917 \begin_inset space \space{}
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25925 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25931 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25932 and its alignment within the page.
25935 \begin_layout Standard
25937 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25947 height_special "totalheight"
25952 backgroundcolor "none"
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25958 This is a minipage.
25959 The text is set in an italic style.
25962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25965 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25966 another formatting.
25974 \begin_layout Standard
25975 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25978 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25982 as described in section
25983 \begin_inset space ~
25987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25989 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25994 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26000 \begin_layout Standard
26001 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26011 height_special "totalheight"
26016 backgroundcolor "none"
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26020 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26021 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26027 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26031 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26041 height_special "totalheight"
26046 backgroundcolor "none"
26049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26050 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26051 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26059 \begin_layout Standard
26060 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26066 \begin_layout Standard
26067 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26069 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26076 \begin_inset space ~
26084 \begin_layout Chapter
26085 Mathematical Formulas
26086 \begin_inset Index idx
26089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26096 \begin_inset Index idx
26099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26130 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26137 \begin_layout Standard
26138 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26143 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26146 \begin_layout Section
26148 \begin_inset Index idx
26151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26160 \begin_layout Standard
26161 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26174 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26176 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26177 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26178 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26186 \begin_layout Standard
26187 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26191 \begin_inset space ~
26196 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26199 \begin_layout Standard
26200 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26201 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26204 \begin_layout Standard
26205 This is a line with an inline formula
26206 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26212 \begin_layout Standard
26213 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26214 paragraph, like this one:
26215 \begin_inset Formula
26222 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26225 \begin_layout Standard
26227 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26229 For example, typing
26230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26243 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26244 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26248 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26251 \begin_inset space ~
26259 \begin_layout Subsection
26260 Navigating in Formulas
26261 \begin_inset Index idx
26264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26273 \begin_layout Standard
26274 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26275 achieved with the arrow keys.
26277 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26278 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26283 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26284 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26288 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26292 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26295 \end{array}\right]$
26303 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26308 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26309 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26312 \begin_layout Standard
26317 , printed in this document as
26318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26322 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26329 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26330 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26331 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26336 For example, if you want
26337 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26345 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26355 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26359 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26364 , since in the latter case only the
26367 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26372 will be under the square root sign:
26373 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26379 \begin_layout Standard
26380 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26382 \begin_inset Formula
26384 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26393 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26394 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26397 \begin_layout Subsection
26401 \begin_layout Standard
26402 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26403 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26407 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26408 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26409 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26410 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26411 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26415 \begin_layout Subsection
26416 Exponents and Subscripts
26417 \begin_inset Index idx
26420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26427 \begin_inset Index idx
26430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26439 \begin_layout Standard
26440 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26443 arg "math-superscript"
26449 arg "math-subscript"
26452 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26454 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26457 , type in a formula
26460 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26470 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26476 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26480 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26486 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26492 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26501 , you have to use an extra
26505 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26506 For example, if you want
26507 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26513 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26519 Subscripts are similar: To get
26520 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26526 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26534 \begin_layout Subsection
26536 \begin_inset Index idx
26539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26548 \begin_layout Standard
26549 Create a fraction either with the command
26555 or by using the icon
26558 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26564 \begin_inset space ~
26570 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26571 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26572 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26577 To move back up, press
26582 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26583 \begin_inset Formula
26585 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26588 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26596 \begin_layout Subsection
26598 \begin_inset Index idx
26601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26610 \begin_layout Standard
26611 Roots can be created using the
26614 \begin_inset space ~
26622 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26628 arg "math-insert \\root"
26650 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26656 always produces a square root.
26659 \begin_layout Subsection
26660 Operators with Limits
26661 \begin_inset Index idx
26664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26671 \begin_inset Index idx
26674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26683 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26692 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26696 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26699 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26700 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26701 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26702 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26703 The sum operator will automatically place its
26704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26711 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26713 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26717 \begin_inset Formula
26719 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26724 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26728 \begin_layout Standard
26729 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26731 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26732 behind the operator and using the menu
26734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26735 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26737 \begin_inset space ~
26741 \begin_inset space ~
26755 \begin_layout Standard
26756 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26765 \begin_inset Index idx
26768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26775 \begin_inset Formula
26777 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26782 which will place the
26783 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26795 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26796 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26802 \begin_layout Standard
26803 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26810 Have a look at section
26811 \begin_inset space ~
26815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26817 reference "subsec:Functions"
26821 for an explanation of function macros.
26824 \begin_layout Subsection
26826 \begin_inset Index idx
26829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26838 \begin_layout Standard
26839 Most math symbols can be found in the
26842 \begin_inset space ~
26847 under one of several categories; including
26864 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26868 \begin_layout Standard
26869 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26870 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26871 don't have to use the
26874 \begin_inset space ~
26879 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26881 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26884 \begin_layout Subsection
26886 \begin_inset Index idx
26889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26898 \begin_layout Standard
26899 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26905 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26911 \begin_inset space ~
26919 arg "math-insert \\space"
26923 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26924 For example, the sequence
26929 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26932 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26934 \begin_inset Graphics
26935 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26940 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26941 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26942 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26943 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26944 , because they are negative
26946 Here are two examples:
26949 \begin_layout Standard
26959 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26965 \begin_layout Standard
26975 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26981 \begin_layout Subsection
26983 \begin_inset Index idx
26986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26995 name "subsec:Functions"
27002 \begin_layout Standard
27006 \begin_inset space ~
27011 contains under the button
27014 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27017 a number of function macros, such as
27018 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27022 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27030 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27037 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27038 avoid confusions, because
27039 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27043 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27049 \begin_layout Standard
27050 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27052 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27056 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27062 \begin_layout Standard
27063 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27064 are placed, as described in section
27065 \begin_inset space ~
27069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27071 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27078 \begin_layout Subsection
27080 \begin_inset Index idx
27083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27092 \begin_layout Standard
27093 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27095 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27096 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27097 commands, for example, to enter
27098 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27101 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27102 Our example is entered by typing
27107 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27114 \begin_inset space ~
27118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27120 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27124 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27127 \begin_layout Standard
27128 \begin_inset Float table
27135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27136 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27141 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27145 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27155 \begin_inset Tabular
27156 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27157 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27244 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27298 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27352 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27406 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27460 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27514 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27568 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27622 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27676 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27721 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27742 \begin_layout Standard
27743 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27746 \begin_inset space ~
27754 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27757 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27761 \begin_layout Section
27762 Brackets and Delimiters
27763 \begin_inset Index idx
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27773 \begin_inset Index idx
27776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27785 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27792 \begin_layout Standard
27793 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27795 For some purposes, using just the keys
27800 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27801 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27802 toolbar delimiter icon
27805 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27809 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27810 \begin_inset Formula
27812 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27820 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27821 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27825 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27828 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27834 \begin_inset Formula
27836 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27844 \begin_layout Standard
27845 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27846 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27850 \begin_layout Standard
27851 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27852 left side and right side.
27853 If you use the option
27856 \begin_inset space ~
27861 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27862 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27864 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27869 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27870 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27873 \begin_layout Standard
27874 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27875 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27876 is to go inside the brackets.
27877 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27882 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27883 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27884 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27888 arg "math-delim ( )"
27894 \begin_layout Section
27895 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27896 \begin_inset Index idx
27899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27906 \begin_inset Index idx
27909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27916 \begin_inset Index idx
27919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27920 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27928 \begin_layout Standard
27929 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27933 \begin_inset space ~
27941 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27945 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27946 Here is an example:
27947 \begin_inset Formula
27949 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27958 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27959 \begin_inset space ~
27963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27965 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27970 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27971 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27972 This alignment is set in the box
27977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28026 for every column as default.
28027 For example, the sequence
28028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28039 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28040 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28041 corresponds to the relevant column.
28042 The result will look like this:
28043 \begin_inset Formula
28046 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28047 column & has & has\,right\\
28048 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28057 \begin_layout Standard
28058 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28061 arg "newline-insert newline"
28064 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28065 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28067 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28070 or the math toolbar.
28073 \begin_layout Standard
28074 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28075 It can be created with the menu
28077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28078 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28080 \begin_inset space ~
28092 Here is an example:
28093 \begin_inset Formula
28107 \begin_layout Standard
28108 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28111 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28114 arg "newline-insert newline"
28118 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28123 arg "newline-insert newline"
28126 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28134 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28135 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28136 A new row is created by every further entry of
28139 arg "newline-insert newline"
28143 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28144 Here is an example:
28145 \begin_inset Formula
28147 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28148 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28153 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28154 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28155 \begin_inset Formula
28157 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28173 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28174 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28177 reference "eq:asquared"
28182 The other types are described in section
28183 \begin_inset space ~
28187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28189 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28196 \begin_layout Section
28197 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28198 \begin_inset Index idx
28201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28202 Math ! Formula numbering
28208 \begin_inset Index idx
28211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28212 Math ! Referencing formulas
28218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28220 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28227 \begin_layout Standard
28228 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28230 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28231 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28233 \begin_inset space ~
28237 \begin_inset space ~
28245 arg "math-number-toggle"
28249 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28250 within parentheses.
28251 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28252 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28253 the document class.
28254 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28255 separated by a dot:
28256 \begin_inset Formula
28266 arg "math-number-toggle"
28269 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28270 You can only number displayed formulas.
28273 \begin_layout Standard
28274 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28276 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28277 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28279 \begin_inset space ~
28283 \begin_inset space ~
28291 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28294 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28295 \begin_inset Formula
28298 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28304 To number all lines use the shortcut
28307 arg "math-number-toggle"
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28314 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28317 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28318 A label is inserted with the menu
28320 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28329 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28330 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28331 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28343 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28344 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28345 We inserted in the following example the label
28346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28353 in the second line:
28354 \begin_inset Formula
28356 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28357 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28362 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28363 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28364 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28368 \begin_inset space ~
28376 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28380 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28381 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28382 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28383 as the formula number:
28386 \begin_layout Standard
28387 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28390 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28397 \begin_layout Standard
28398 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28399 's cross-reference box are described in section
28400 \begin_inset space ~
28404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28406 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28411 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28419 \begin_layout Section
28420 User defined math macros
28421 \begin_inset Index idx
28424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28435 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28436 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28437 Math macros are explained in section
28440 \begin_inset space ~
28452 \begin_layout Section
28456 \begin_layout Subsection
28458 \begin_inset Index idx
28461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28470 \begin_layout Standard
28471 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28472 To set a font in a formula, use the
28475 \begin_inset space ~
28483 arg "math-insert \\font"
28486 , or enter its command, listed in table
28487 \begin_inset space ~
28491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28493 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28500 \begin_layout Standard
28501 \begin_inset Float table
28508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28509 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28514 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28518 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28528 \begin_inset Tabular
28529 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28530 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28531 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28532 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28564 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28591 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28618 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28651 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28678 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28700 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28706 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28707 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28720 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28736 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28770 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28792 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28798 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28806 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28819 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28835 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28869 \begin_layout Standard
28870 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28878 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28881 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28883 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28887 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28906 \begin_layout Standard
28907 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28908 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28913 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28914 space when you need a space in the box.
28915 Here is an example where
28916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28927 denotes the set of numbers:
28928 \begin_inset Formula
28930 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28938 \begin_layout Standard
28939 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28940 You can, for example, put a character in
28949 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28953 \begin_inset Newline newline
28956 So it is better not to use this feature.
28959 \begin_layout Standard
28960 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28961 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28965 \begin_inset Newline newline
28968 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28974 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28975 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28981 \begin_layout Standard
28988 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28991 \begin_layout Standard
28992 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28994 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28995 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28997 \begin_inset space ~
29005 \begin_layout Subsection
29007 \begin_inset Index idx
29010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29019 \begin_layout Standard
29020 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29022 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29026 \begin_inset space ~
29030 \begin_inset space ~
29038 \begin_inset space ~
29046 arg "math-insert \\font"
29050 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29051 in black instead of blue.
29052 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29053 Here is an example:
29054 \begin_inset Formula
29057 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29058 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29067 \begin_layout Subsection
29069 \begin_inset Index idx
29072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29081 \begin_layout Standard
29082 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29083 automatically chosen in most situations.
29101 For most characters,
29109 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29110 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29115 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29116 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29117 thinks are appropriate.
29118 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29121 arg "math-insert \\style"
29125 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29126 For example, you can set
29127 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29130 , which is normally in
29139 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29143 The four styles are used in the following example:
29146 \begin_layout Standard
29147 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29151 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29155 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29159 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29165 \begin_layout Standard
29166 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29167 is set in a particular size with the menu
29169 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29171 \begin_inset space ~
29176 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29177 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29178 will be adjusted to correspond.
29179 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29190 \begin_layout Standard
29194 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29200 \begin_layout Section
29201 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29203 \begin_inset Index idx
29206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29213 \begin_inset Index idx
29216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29225 \begin_layout Standard
29227 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29228 that are in common use.
29231 \begin_layout Subsection
29232 Enabling AMS-Support
29235 \begin_layout Standard
29236 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29238 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29254 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29255 selecting the checkbox
29258 \begin_inset space ~
29262 \begin_inset space ~
29266 \begin_inset space ~
29275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29279 \begin_inset Index idx
29282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29283 Document ! Settings
29291 \begin_inset space ~
29297 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29298 -errors in formulas,
29299 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29302 \begin_layout Subsection
29304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29306 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29311 \begin_inset Index idx
29314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29315 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29323 \begin_layout Standard
29324 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29325 provides a selection of different formula types.
29327 allows you to choose between
29348 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29349 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29356 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29359 \begin_layout Chapter
29363 \begin_layout Section
29365 \begin_inset Index idx
29368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29377 name "sec:Cross-References"
29384 \begin_layout Standard
29385 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29386 's strengths is cross-references.
29387 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29389 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29390 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29391 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29394 \begin_layout Enumerate
29398 \begin_layout Enumerate
29399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29401 name "enu:Second-item"
29408 \begin_layout Enumerate
29412 \begin_layout Standard
29413 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29418 or by pressing the toolbar button
29425 A gray label box like this:
29426 \begin_inset Graphics
29427 filename clipart/label.png
29431 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29433 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29468 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29469 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29485 \begin_layout Standard
29486 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29491 or the toolbar button
29494 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29498 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29499 \begin_inset Graphics
29500 filename clipart/reference.png
29504 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29506 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29519 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29523 \begin_layout Standard
29524 As an alternative to
29526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29529 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29534 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29535 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29537 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29549 \begin_layout Standard
29550 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29551 \begin_inset space ~
29555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29557 reference "enu:Second-item"
29564 \begin_layout Standard
29565 It is recommended to use a protected space
29569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29570 described in section
29571 \begin_inset space ~
29575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29577 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29586 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29587 line breaks between them.
29590 \begin_layout Standard
29591 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29594 \begin_layout Description
29595 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29598 reference "fig:Two-images"
29605 \begin_layout Description
29606 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29607 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29619 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29626 \begin_layout Description
29627 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29628 \begin_inset space ~
29632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29633 LatexCommand pageref
29634 reference "fig:Two-images"
29641 \begin_layout Description
29643 \begin_inset space ~
29647 \begin_inset space ~
29650 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29652 LatexCommand vpageref
29653 reference "fig:Two-images"
29658 \begin_inset Newline newline
29661 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29662 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29663 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29664 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29665 it prints “on the next page”.
29666 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29669 \begin_layout Description
29671 \begin_inset space ~
29675 \begin_inset space ~
29679 \begin_inset space ~
29682 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29685 reference "fig:Two-images"
29690 \begin_inset Newline newline
29693 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29699 ; otherwise it behaves like
29703 \begin_inset space ~
29707 \begin_inset space ~
29716 \begin_layout Description
29718 \begin_inset space ~
29721 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29722 \begin_inset Newline newline
29726 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29734 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29744 \begin_inset Index idx
29747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29749 packages ! prettyref
29755 \begin_inset Index idx
29758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29760 packages ! refstyle
29771 \begin_inset Newline newline
29774 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29775 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29778 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29782 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29783 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29791 is the default and preferred because
29795 supports only English documents.
29796 The format is specified by using the command
29800 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
29809 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29810 preamble of the document.
29811 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29829 \begin_inset Newline newline
29836 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29841 \begin_inset Newline newline
29852 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29853 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29855 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29856 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29861 , you might do so as follows:
29862 \begin_inset Newline newline
29869 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
29870 format{prop}{Proposition
29875 \begin_inset Newline newline
29878 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29879 the package documentation
29880 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29882 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29888 \begin_inset Newline newline
29899 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29906 \begin_layout Description
29908 \begin_inset space ~
29911 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29913 LatexCommand nameref
29914 reference "fig:Two-images"
29921 \begin_layout Description
29923 \begin_inset space ~
29926 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29927 label for the reference:
29928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29929 LatexCommand labelonly
29930 reference "fig:Two-images"
29935 \begin_inset Newline newline
29938 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29939 Code, if you want to issue a command
29940 that \SpecialChar LyX
29946 , then you may want to use the
29949 \begin_inset space ~
29954 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29964 This is the form needed for e.
29965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29969 \begin_inset space \space{}
29976 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29977 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29979 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29983 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29987 \begin_layout Standard
29988 You can only use the style
29992 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29996 is always possible.
29999 \begin_layout Standard
30000 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30001 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30003 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30004 \begin_inset space ~
30008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30010 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30017 \begin_layout Standard
30018 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30022 \begin_inset space ~
30026 \begin_inset space ~
30031 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30032 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30033 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30036 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30039 \begin_inset space ~
30044 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30045 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30048 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30052 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30053 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30054 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30060 \begin_layout Standard
30061 You can change labels at any time.
30062 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30064 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30066 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30067 change them all manually
30072 \begin_layout Standard
30073 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30075 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30079 \begin_layout Standard
30080 References are described in detail in the section
30091 \begin_layout Section
30092 Table of Contents and other Listings
30093 \begin_inset Index idx
30096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30103 \begin_inset Index idx
30106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30107 Navigating ! Outline
30113 \begin_inset Index idx
30116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30132 \begin_layout Subsection
30134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30136 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30143 \begin_layout Standard
30144 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30147 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30149 \begin_inset space ~
30153 \begin_inset space ~
30159 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30161 If you click on it, the
30165 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30166 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30167 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30169 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30171 \begin_inset space ~
30176 that is described in section
30177 \begin_inset space ~
30181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30183 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30190 \begin_layout Standard
30191 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30192 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30194 \begin_inset space ~
30198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30200 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30204 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30206 \begin_inset space ~
30210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30212 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30216 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30218 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30221 \begin_layout Subsection
30222 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30225 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30232 \begin_layout Standard
30233 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30235 You can insert them via the
30237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30238 List/Contents/References
30241 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30244 \begin_layout Section
30245 URLs and Hyperlinks
30246 \begin_inset Index idx
30249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30256 \begin_inset Index idx
30259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30268 \begin_layout Subsection
30270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30279 \begin_layout Standard
30280 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30282 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30288 \begin_layout Standard
30289 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30291 \begin_inset Flex URL
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30296 https://www.lyx.org
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30305 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30311 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30315 \begin_layout Standard
30316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30324 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30333 \begin_layout Subsection
30335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30337 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30344 \begin_layout Standard
30345 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30350 or with the toolbar button
30357 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30366 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30367 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30368 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30370 name "LyX's homepage"
30371 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30376 , an Email address like this:
30377 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30379 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30380 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30386 , or a link to a file.
30391 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30399 \begin_layout Standard
30400 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30413 to the link target.
30416 \begin_layout Standard
30417 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30418 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30419 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30420 the text style dialog.
30421 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30427 name "LyX's homepage"
30428 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30436 \begin_layout Standard
30437 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30441 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30444 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30448 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30450 \begin_inset Newline newline
30458 \begin_inset Newline newline
30465 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30466 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30470 \begin_layout Section
30472 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30474 \begin_inset Index idx
30477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30486 name "sec:Counters"
30493 \begin_layout Standard
30495 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30496 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30497 is its ability to manage counters.
30498 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30499 modify counters directly.
30500 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30502 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30503 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30504 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30505 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30506 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30510 \begin_layout Standard
30512 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30513 There are five commands you can use:
30516 \begin_layout Enumerate
30518 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30519 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30522 \begin_layout Enumerate
30524 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30525 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30526 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30529 \begin_layout Enumerate
30531 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30532 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30535 \begin_layout Enumerate
30537 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30538 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30542 \begin_layout Enumerate
30544 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30545 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30548 \begin_layout Standard
30550 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30551 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30552 those that are available in the current document class.
30557 \begin_layout Section
30559 \begin_inset Index idx
30562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30571 name "sec:Appendices"
30578 \begin_layout Standard
30579 Appendices are created with the menu
30581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30583 \begin_inset space ~
30587 \begin_inset space ~
30593 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30594 as the appendix part of the book.
30595 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30598 \begin_layout Standard
30599 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30600 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30601 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30602 and the subsection number.
30603 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30607 \begin_layout Standard
30609 \begin_inset space ~
30613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30615 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30623 \begin_inset space ~
30627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30629 reference "subsec:Export"
30636 \begin_layout Section
30638 \begin_inset Index idx
30641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30650 name "sec:Bibliography"
30657 \begin_layout Standard
30658 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30660 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30661 \begin_inset space ~
30665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30667 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30674 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30679 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30680 \begin_inset space ~
30684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30686 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30691 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30692 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30693 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30697 using a bibliography database.
30700 \begin_layout Standard
30701 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30702 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30706 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30707 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30708 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30709 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30710 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30713 \begin_layout Subsection
30714 The Bibliography Environment
30715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30717 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30724 \begin_layout Standard
30729 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30731 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30740 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30742 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30743 of ASCII characters only.
30747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30749 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30752 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30758 \begin_inset Newline newline
30762 \begin_inset Flex URL
30765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30767 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30777 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30787 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30788 \begin_inset Newline newline
30795 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30796 the number of the entry.
30801 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30810 \begin_layout Standard
30811 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30813 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30816 or the toolbar button
30819 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30823 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30824 containing the available citations.
30825 Select one or more keys from the list and
30835 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30836 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30840 \begin_layout Standard
30841 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30842 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30843 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30855 \begin_layout Standard
30859 Companion Second Edition
30862 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30864 key "latexcompanion"
30872 \begin_layout Standard
30873 The \SpecialChar LyX
30874 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30875 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30885 \begin_layout Standard
30886 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30893 \begin_inset Index idx
30896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30905 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30906 the label needs to be given the form
30907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30918 Author A and Author B(Year)
30919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30926 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30933 \begin_inset space ~
30938 in the document settings
30939 \begin_inset Index idx
30942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30943 Document ! Settings
30950 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30952 \begin_inset space ~
30958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30960 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30968 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30970 Once you have done that, the
30974 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30991 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30992 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30993 These two are madatory.
30994 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30997 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30999 ) and in abrreviated form (
31006 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31007 add the abbreviated form to
31011 and the full list to the optional
31019 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31020 If specified like this,
31022 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31023 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31033 is specified, toggling
31034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31041 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31042 full and abbreviated list
31046 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31047 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31048 the citation references.
31049 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31054 \begin_layout Standard
31055 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31058 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31068 arg "layout-paragraph"
31072 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31075 \begin_layout Subsection
31076 Bibliography databases
31077 \begin_inset Index idx
31080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31081 Bibliography ! Databases
31087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31089 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31096 \begin_layout Standard
31097 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31103 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31105 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31106 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31111 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31113 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31114 your working field in a database.
31115 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31116 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31117 list for that document.
31118 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31122 \begin_layout Standard
31123 The database is a text file with the file extension
31124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31135 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31136 The format is explained in
31137 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31144 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31146 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31148 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31154 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31155 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31156 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31158 \begin_inset Flex URL
31161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31163 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31171 \begin_layout Standard
31173 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31174 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31175 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31177 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31179 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31180 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31181 Those are addressed by
31186 \begin_inset Index idx
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31191 packages ! biblatex
31197 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31198 (although it has been significantly
31199 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31209 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31210 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31211 might conversely fail to correctly
31212 handle databases that use specific
31221 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31225 \begin_layout Standard
31226 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31231 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31237 \begin_inset Index idx
31240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31241 Document ! Settings
31253 \begin_inset space ~
31258 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31266 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31267 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31269 \begin_inset Index idx
31272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31273 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31282 \begin_layout Standard
31283 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31287 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31289 \begin_inset space ~
31295 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31296 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31304 Add bibliography to TOC
31306 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31311 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31312 in the document or just the cited references.
31314 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31319 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31320 differ from the encoding of the document.
31325 \begin_layout Standard
31326 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31327 style file is a text file with the file extension
31328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31339 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31340 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31341 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31342 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31344 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31350 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31351 \begin_inset Newline newline
31355 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31357 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31367 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31372 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31376 \begin_layout Standard
31377 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31382 \begin_inset Index idx
31385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31386 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31392 \begin_inset Index idx
31395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31397 packages ! biblatex
31405 \begin_layout Standard
31406 Accessing a database via
31410 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31414 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31416 \begin_inset space ~
31422 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31423 you cannot select a
31428 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31432 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31435 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31436 As for the styles, note the following.
31441 \begin_layout Standard
31446 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31459 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31460 file (text file with the file extension
31461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31472 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31473 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31475 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31484 styles are not set in the
31487 \begin_inset space ~
31492 dialog, but in the document settings.
31493 \begin_inset Index idx
31496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31497 Document ! Settings
31502 However, in the dialog in the
31506 field, which is only visible if you use
31510 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31511 example how its heading will appear).
31512 These options are described in detail in the
31517 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31527 \begin_layout Standard
31528 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31529 \begin_inset space ~
31533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31535 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31546 Bibliography Processors
31549 \begin_layout Standard
31550 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31551 uses a bibliography processor,
31552 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31553 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31554 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31556 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31557 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31560 \begin_layout Standard
31561 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31563 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31564 You can do this on a general level in
31566 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31567 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31568 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31571 or for individual documents in
31573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31574 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31578 The following variants are available by default:
31581 \begin_layout Description
31582 biber a specific, modern processor
31583 \begin_inset Index idx
31586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31593 developed exclusively for
31597 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31603 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31608 makes use of; if you use the
31612 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31619 \begin_layout Description
31620 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31621 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31622 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31626 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31629 \begin_layout Description
31630 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31631 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31635 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31639 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31643 features are supported.
31646 \begin_layout Standard
31647 By default (with the
31653 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31654 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31667 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31668 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31669 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31672 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31673 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31686 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31687 -based bibliography styles).
31688 This should suit most needs.
31691 \begin_layout Standard
31692 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31693 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31694 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31699 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31700 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31701 You can adjust it in
31703 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31704 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31705 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31711 \begin_layout Standard
31712 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31713 can add below the selection.
31714 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31715 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31721 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31735 \begin_layout Standard
31737 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31739 These are explained in detail in section
31741 Customizing Bibliographies
31745 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31750 Additional Features
31753 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31757 \begin_layout Subsection
31759 \begin_inset Index idx
31762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31763 Bibliography ! Citation format
31769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31771 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31778 \begin_layout Standard
31779 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31784 \begin_inset space \space{}
31787 numerical citation (as
31788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31795 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31803 ) or author-year citations (as
31804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31813 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31817 \begin_layout Standard
31818 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31822 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31826 \begin_inset Index idx
31829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31830 Document ! Settings
31835 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31841 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31842 labels, is there to use
31845 \begin_inset space ~
31856 \begin_inset space ~
31861 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31864 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31871 \begin_layout Standard
31872 With a bibliography database (see
31873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31875 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31882 ) one has in contrary to the
31886 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31887 These style formats are available:
31890 \begin_layout Description
31892 \begin_inset space ~
31895 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31896 -based approached without any additional packages
31897 (simple numeric citations).
31900 \begin_layout Description
31901 Biblatex loads the package
31906 \begin_inset Index idx
31909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31911 packages ! biblatex
31916 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31918 Biblatex citation style
31922 Biblatex bibliography style
31925 Options to the package
31929 can be entered in the
31936 \begin_layout Description
31938 \begin_inset space ~
31942 \begin_inset space ~
31945 mode) loads the package
31949 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31950 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31962 behavior very closely.
31967 this option has some additional styles.
31972 styles are also supported by this variant.
31975 \begin_layout Description
31977 \begin_inset space ~
31980 (BibTeX) loads the package
31985 \begin_inset Index idx
31988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31995 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31998 \begin_layout Description
32000 \begin_inset space ~
32003 (BibTeX) loads the package
32008 \begin_inset Index idx
32011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32018 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32021 \begin_layout Standard
32030 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32032 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32041 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32043 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32044 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32046 Biblatex citation style
32049 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32055 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32059 \begin_layout Standard
32060 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32061 are available in the
32066 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32067 a name prefix such as
32068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32083 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32088 \begin_inset space \space{}
32092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32103 \begin_layout Standard
32104 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32110 \begin_inset space \space{}
32113 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32119 \begin_inset space \space{}
32123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32135 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32139 \begin_inset space ~
32147 \begin_inset space ~
32153 Here is a simple example where the text
32154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32158 \begin_inset space ~
32162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32165 appears after the reference:
32168 \begin_layout Quote
32170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32173 key "latexcompanion"
32181 \begin_layout Standard
32182 All styles except for
32186 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32196 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32200 \begin_layout Standard
32201 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32202 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32203 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32208 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32209 multi-citation (so-called
32210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32213 qualified citation lists
32214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32220 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32225 dialog will display three columns in the field
32232 \begin_inset space ~
32240 \begin_inset space ~
32248 \begin_inset space ~
32254 If you double-click on an item's
32257 \begin_inset space ~
32265 \begin_inset space ~
32270 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32273 General text before
32279 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32282 \begin_layout Subsection
32284 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32287 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32291 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32295 \begin_layout Standard
32297 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32299 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32302 \begin_inset space ~
32306 \begin_inset space ~
32310 \begin_inset space ~
32314 \begin_inset space ~
32317 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32320 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32323 \begin_layout Itemize
32325 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32326 If citation entries include any of the fields
32327 \begin_inset Flex Code
32330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32332 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32341 \begin_inset Flex Code
32344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32346 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32354 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32355 \begin_inset Flex Code
32358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32360 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32368 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32369 \begin_inset Flex Code
32372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32374 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32382 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32385 \begin_layout Itemize
32387 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32388 If citation entries include any of the fields
32389 \begin_inset Flex Code
32392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32394 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32402 (filled by JabRef) or
32403 \begin_inset Flex Code
32406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32408 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32416 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32417 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32418 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32421 \begin_layout Standard
32423 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32424 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32425 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32428 Search drive for cited files
32432 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32433 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32434 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32435 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32439 It uses the tokens supplied at
32443 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32444 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32445 arbitrary position).
32447 opens the first matching file it finds.
32448 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32449 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32450 the chance this works for you.
32455 \begin_layout Standard
32457 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32458 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32459 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32461 \begin_inset Flex Code
32464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32466 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32475 \begin_inset Flex Code
32478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32480 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32488 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32492 Cite format description
32499 \begin_layout Section
32501 \begin_inset Index idx
32504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32520 \begin_layout Standard
32521 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32525 \begin_inset space ~
32530 or the toolbar button
32537 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32538 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32539 by \SpecialChar LyX
32540 as the index entry.
32543 \begin_layout Standard
32544 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32547 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32549 \begin_inset space ~
32555 A light blue box labeled
32556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32567 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32568 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32572 \begin_layout Standard
32573 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32574 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32575 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32576 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32578 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32580 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32588 \begin_layout Subsection
32589 Grouping Index Entries
32590 \begin_inset Index idx
32593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32602 \begin_layout Standard
32603 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32605 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32606 lists under the entry
32607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32615 First we create the entry
32616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32624 \begin_inset space ~
32628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32630 reference "subsec:Lists"
32635 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32636 \begin_inset space ~
32640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32642 reference "sec:Itemize"
32646 , we insert the command
32649 \begin_layout Standard
32655 \begin_layout Standard
32659 \begin_layout Standard
32665 \begin_layout Standard
32666 for the enumerated list in section
32667 \begin_inset space ~
32671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32673 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32680 \begin_layout Standard
32681 The exclamation mark
32682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32689 marks the grouping levels.
32690 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32691 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32692 If we don't have an index entry for
32693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32700 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32703 \begin_layout Subsection
32705 \begin_inset Index idx
32708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32709 Index ! Page ranges
32717 \begin_layout Standard
32718 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32720 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32721 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32722 an index entry in section
32723 \begin_inset space ~
32727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32729 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32736 \begin_layout Standard
32739 Paragraph environments|(
32742 \begin_layout Standard
32743 and another entry at the end of section
32744 \begin_inset space ~
32748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32750 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32757 \begin_layout Standard
32760 Paragraph environments|)
32763 \begin_layout Standard
32765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32788 respectively start and end the index range.
32789 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32790 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32791 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32792 An example is the index entry
32793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32796 Document ! Settings
32797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32803 \begin_layout Subsection
32805 \begin_inset Index idx
32808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32809 Index ! Cross referencing
32817 \begin_layout Standard
32818 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32819 We referred for example in the index entry
32820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32834 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32838 ) to the index entry
32839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32846 in the same section using the entry
32849 \begin_layout Standard
32852 GIF|see{Image formats}
32855 \begin_layout Standard
32856 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32858 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32859 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32862 \begin_layout Subsection
32864 \begin_inset Index idx
32867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32868 Index ! Entry order
32876 \begin_layout Standard
32877 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32878 follow the rules for the index order.
32879 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32885 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32887 \begin_inset space ~
32891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32893 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32902 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32903 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32928 \begin_inset Index idx
32931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32932 Dummy entries ! maïs
32938 \begin_inset Index idx
32941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32942 Dummy entries ! maître
32948 \begin_inset Index idx
32951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32952 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32957 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32958 maïs, maison, maître.
32959 To achieve this, we use the command
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32965 previous entry@current entry
32968 \begin_layout Standard
32969 In our case we want to have
32970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32985 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32988 \begin_layout Standard
32994 \begin_layout Standard
32995 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32996 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32998 See the next subsection for an example.
33001 \begin_layout Subsection
33003 \begin_inset Index idx
33006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33007 Index ! Entry layout
33015 \begin_layout Standard
33016 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33017 \begin_inset Index idx
33020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33023 This is an italic dummy entry
33028 You can also format the page number using the character
33029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33036 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33037 -command without a backslash.
33038 We can write for example
33041 \begin_layout Standard
33044 italic page number:|textit
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33048 to get the page number in italic.
33049 \begin_inset Index idx
33052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33053 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33058 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33059 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33077 \begin_inset space ~
33083 Have a look at section
33084 \begin_inset space ~
33088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33090 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33094 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33098 \begin_layout Standard
33099 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33107 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33111 to generate the index, see section
33112 \begin_inset space ~
33116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33118 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33127 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33132 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33136 key "latexcompanion"
33149 \begin_layout Standard
33150 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33152 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33153 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33154 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33155 If so, put the following in the preamble
33158 \begin_layout Standard
33170 \begin_layout Standard
33174 \begin_layout Standard
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33181 in the index entry.
33182 \begin_inset Index idx
33185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33186 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33191 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33192 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33193 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33196 \begin_layout Standard
33197 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33198 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33199 a bold font for all index entries.
33200 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33212 documentation for details,
33213 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33215 key "makeindex,xindy"
33223 \begin_layout Subsection
33225 \begin_inset Index idx
33228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33237 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33244 \begin_layout Standard
33245 If the index generation program
33249 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33250 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33254 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33255 distribution, is used.
33259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33264 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33265 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33266 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33267 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33268 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33278 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33280 dialog, see section
33281 \begin_inset space ~
33285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33287 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33292 The available options are listed and explained in
33293 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33295 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33301 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33305 \begin_layout Standard
33306 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33307 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33310 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33311 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33315 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33316 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33319 \begin_layout Subsection
33323 \begin_layout Standard
33324 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33325 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33333 next to the standard index.
33335 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33336 that add this feature.
33343 \begin_inset Index idx
33346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33348 packages ! splitidx
33353 package to generate multiple indexes.
33354 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33360 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33370 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33371 style, but it also includes
33372 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33373 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33381 \begin_layout Standard
33382 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33383 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33385 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33386 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33389 and select the option
33391 Use multiple Indexes
33398 already contains the standard index
33399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33407 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33408 also appear as a heading) to the
33412 input field and press the
33417 The new index now also appears in the list.
33418 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33419 label color to the new index.
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33423 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33427 List/Contents/References
33433 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33434 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33435 are additional features:
33438 \begin_layout Itemize
33439 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33440 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33443 \begin_layout Itemize
33444 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33445 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33450 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33451 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33452 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33453 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33456 \begin_layout Itemize
33461 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33462 code in the name of the index.
33465 \begin_layout Section
33466 Nomenclature/Glossary
33467 \begin_inset Index idx
33470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33477 \begin_inset Index idx
33480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33511 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33518 \begin_layout Standard
33519 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33520 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33521 called nomenclature or glossary.
33524 \begin_layout Standard
33525 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33532 \begin_inset Index idx
33535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33543 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33545 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33552 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33556 \begin_layout Standard
33557 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33558 and then use the menu
33560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33566 \begin_inset space ~
33571 or the toolbar button
33574 arg "nomencl-insert"
33579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33590 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33594 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33595 The first is the term or
33599 that you wish to define.
33604 of the term or symbol.
33607 \begin_layout Standard
33608 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33616 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33617 code for nomenclature entries the option
33621 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33629 \begin_layout Subsection
33630 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33631 \begin_inset Index idx
33634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33635 Nomenclature ! Layout
33643 \begin_layout Standard
33644 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33648 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33655 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33663 \begin_inset Newline newline
33671 \begin_inset Newline newline
33677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33684 character starts/ends the formula.
33685 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33686 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33698 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33708 \begin_layout Standard
33709 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33710 syntax is given in section
33711 \begin_inset space ~
33715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33717 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33724 \begin_layout Standard
33728 \begin_inset space ~
33733 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33735 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33740 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33747 in this document is:
33748 \begin_inset Newline newline
33753 dummy entry for the character
33758 \begin_inset Newline newline
33770 \begin_inset space ~
33780 font use the command
33809 \begin_layout Standard
33810 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33815 \begin_inset space \space{}
33819 \begin_inset Newline newline
33835 \begin_inset Newline newline
33838 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33839 This command will make the font of all symbols
33846 \begin_inset space ~
33854 \begin_layout Standard
33855 If the characters |
33856 \begin_inset space \space{}
33860 \begin_inset space \space{}
33864 \begin_inset space \space{}
33868 \begin_inset space \space{}
33872 \begin_inset space \space{}
33875 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33876 code they need to be escaped
33877 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33878 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33879 LatexCommand nomenclature
33880 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33881 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33889 \begin_layout Subsection
33890 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33891 \begin_inset Index idx
33894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33895 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33903 \begin_layout Standard
33904 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33905 -code of the symbol
33907 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33909 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33912 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33913 LatexCommand nomenclature
33915 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33923 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33927 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33928 LatexCommand nomenclature
33931 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33937 They will be sorted by
33938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33964 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33967 will be sorted before the
33971 since the character
33972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33979 is considered in sorting.
33982 \begin_layout Standard
33983 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33986 \begin_inset space ~
33991 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33992 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33994 For the example given, you can insert
33998 in this field for the
33999 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34006 will be located before
34007 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34013 \begin_layout Standard
34014 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34019 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34029 \begin_layout Subsection
34030 Nomenclature Options
34031 \begin_inset Index idx
34034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34035 Nomenclature ! Options
34041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34043 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34050 \begin_layout Standard
34055 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34056 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34059 \begin_layout Description
34060 refeq Appends the phrase
34061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34076 to every nomenclature entry, where
34082 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34085 \begin_layout Description
34086 refpage Appends the phrase
34087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34102 to every nomenclature entry, where
34108 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34111 \begin_layout Description
34112 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34115 \begin_layout Standard
34116 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34117 class options list in the
34119 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34123 In this document the options
34130 \begin_layout Standard
34131 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34137 \begin_layout Standard
34138 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34139 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34144 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34147 \begin_layout Description
34157 \begin_layout Description
34160 nomrefpage Like the
34167 \begin_layout Description
34170 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34179 \begin_layout Description
34183 \begin_inset space ~
34189 \begin_inset space ~
34194 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34197 \begin_layout Standard
34199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34206 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34207 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34211 \begin_layout Standard
34220 \begin_inset Newline newline
34226 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34230 \begin_inset space ~
34242 unskip, see equation
34245 \begin_inset Newline newline
34252 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34253 \begin_inset Newline newline
34259 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34263 \begin_inset space ~
34280 \begin_layout Standard
34281 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34284 \begin_inset space ~
34289 in the document settings under
34292 \begin_inset space ~
34300 \begin_layout Standard
34308 \begin_inset Newline newline
34312 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34316 \begin_inset space ~
34328 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34330 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34331 \begin_inset Newline newline
34338 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34339 \begin_inset Newline newline
34343 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34347 \begin_inset space ~
34359 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34364 \begin_layout Subsection
34365 Printing the Nomenclature
34366 \begin_inset Index idx
34369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34370 Nomenclature ! Printing
34378 \begin_layout Standard
34379 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34382 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34398 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34399 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34400 You can choose between these settings:
34403 \begin_layout Description
34404 Default a space of 1
34405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34411 \begin_layout Description
34413 \begin_inset space ~
34417 \begin_inset space ~
34420 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34423 \begin_layout Description
34424 Custom custom space
34427 \begin_layout Standard
34428 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34437 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34445 For example, in order to change the name to
34449 , add the following line to the preamble:
34452 \begin_layout Standard
34465 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34469 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34470 \begin_inset Newline newline
34485 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34488 \begin_layout Subsection
34489 Nomenclature Program
34490 \begin_inset Index idx
34493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34494 Nomenclature ! Program
34500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34502 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34509 \begin_layout Standard
34515 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34516 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34518 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34523 by adding options, see section
34524 \begin_inset space ~
34528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34530 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34535 The available options are listed and explained in
34536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34538 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34546 \begin_layout Section
34548 \begin_inset Index idx
34551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34558 \begin_inset Index idx
34561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34562 Document ! Branches
34568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34570 name "sec:Branches"
34577 \begin_layout Standard
34578 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34579 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34580 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34581 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34584 \begin_layout Standard
34585 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34586 allows you to put text into branches.
34587 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34588 To create a branch, either select the menu
34590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34591 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34594 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34603 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34604 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34605 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34606 and whether the name of the branch should
34607 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34608 (see below for an example).
34609 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34610 to the name of the other) and to add
34611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34623 \begin_inset space ~
34626 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34627 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34630 \begin_layout Standard
34631 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34632 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34637 where you can choose a branch.
34638 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34643 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34644 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34647 \begin_layout Standard
34648 \begin_inset Branch Question
34652 \begin_layout Standard
34657 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34665 \begin_layout Standard
34666 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34670 \begin_layout Standard
34675 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34683 \begin_layout Standard
34690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34691 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34694 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34695 Consider for example a file
34696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34703 which has the above branches.
34705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34712 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34736 branch were inactive,
34737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34752 branch was active, likewise
34753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34768 branch was active, and
34769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34772 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34776 if both branches were active.
34777 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34778 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34784 \begin_layout Standard
34785 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34791 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34792 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34796 \begin_inset space ~
34804 \begin_layout Standard
34805 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34809 \begin_layout Standard
34815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34822 branch is deactivated.
34828 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34835 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34836 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34837 definitions for each branch.
34838 For example you can define for the question branch
34842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34843 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34844 -syntax, see section
34845 \begin_inset space ~
34849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34851 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34863 \begin_layout Standard
34873 \begin_layout Standard
34883 \begin_layout Standard
34884 and for the answer branch
34887 \begin_layout Standard
34897 \begin_layout Standard
34907 \begin_layout Standard
34908 \begin_inset Branch Question
34912 \begin_layout Standard
34916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34944 \begin_layout Standard
34945 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34949 \begin_layout Standard
34953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34981 \begin_layout Standard
34982 Now it is possible to use the
34986 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34993 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34996 commands to obtain conditional output.
34997 Here is an example formula where only the
35004 \begin_inset Formula
35006 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35014 \begin_layout Standard
35015 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35023 \begin_layout Standard
35024 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35030 \begin_inset space \space{}
35033 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35035 For this advanced usage, see the
35041 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35046 \begin_layout Section
35048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35050 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35055 \begin_inset Index idx
35058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35067 \begin_layout Standard
35070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35071 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35074 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35076 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35082 \begin_inset Index idx
35085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35087 packages ! hyperref
35092 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35093 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35094 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35095 part of the document.
35098 \begin_layout Standard
35099 The header information in the dialog tab
35103 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35104 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35105 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35106 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35110 \begin_inset space ~
35114 \begin_inset space ~
35119 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35120 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35121 and author entries.
35125 \begin_inset space ~
35129 \begin_inset space ~
35133 \begin_inset space ~
35138 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35142 You can specify in the dialog tab
35146 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35151 \begin_inset space ~
35155 \begin_inset space ~
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35164 option allows long links to be split;
35167 \begin_inset space ~
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35188 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35191 \begin_inset space ~
35196 colors the different links.
35197 The default colors are:
35200 \begin_layout Labeling
35201 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35206 for hyperlinks and URLs
35209 \begin_layout Labeling
35210 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35218 \begin_layout Labeling
35219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35227 \begin_layout Standard
35228 but you can change these in the field
35233 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35236 \begin_layout Standard
35239 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35242 \begin_layout Standard
35247 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35248 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35249 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35252 \begin_layout Standard
35257 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35258 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35259 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35269 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35270 when opening the PDF.
35272 \begin_inset space ~
35275 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35276 \begin_inset space ~
35279 1 will only display the sections.
35282 \begin_layout Standard
35283 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35284 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35290 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35291 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35301 \begin_layout Section
35303 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35307 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35314 \begin_layout Subsection
35317 \begin_inset Index idx
35320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35330 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35337 \begin_layout Standard
35338 As \SpecialChar LyX
35339 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35340 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35341 commands and constructs,
35344 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35345 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35346 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35347 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35348 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35349 cannot support all packages and
35353 \begin_layout Standard
35354 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35355 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35356 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35360 Code box is created by the menu
35362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35364 \begin_inset space ~
35369 or by the toolbar button
35382 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35391 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35393 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35395 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35400 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35405 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35412 , you can write the command part
35418 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35419 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35423 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35424 Code box behind the word.
35425 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35426 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35430 \begin_layout Standard
35431 \begin_inset Graphics
35432 filename clipart/ERT.png
35440 \begin_layout Standard
35444 \begin_layout Standard
35445 This is a line with a
35449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35472 \begin_layout Standard
35473 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35481 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35482 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35483 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35484 know that the command is finished.
35492 \begin_layout Subsection
35493 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35495 \begin_inset Argument 1
35498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35499 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35506 \begin_inset Index idx
35509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35519 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35526 \begin_layout Standard
35527 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35528 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35529 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35530 uses in the background.
35531 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35532 is based on commands, you can
35533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35541 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35542 any time if you know the right commands.
35543 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35544 is the end of the day.
35545 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35546 all caption labels bold.
35547 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35549 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35553 \begin_layout Standard
35554 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35556 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35558 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35561 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35571 \begin_layout Standard
35572 As result you find that the package
35577 \begin_inset Index idx
35580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35588 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35590 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35593 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35597 \begin_inset space ~
35605 \begin_layout Standard
35610 usepackage[options]{package name}
35613 \begin_layout Standard
35614 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35615 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35616 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35617 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35620 \begin_layout Standard
35621 In your case the package name is
35626 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35631 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35632 So you add the command
35635 \begin_layout Standard
35640 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35643 \begin_layout Standard
35644 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35649 For more commands provided by the
35653 package, have a look at its documentation,
35654 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35669 \begin_layout Standard
35670 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35672 For example if you use a
35676 class, you don't need the package
35680 , you can instead write
35683 \begin_layout Standard
35688 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35693 \begin_layout Standard
35694 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35695 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35696 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35703 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35706 \begin_layout Standard
35707 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35708 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35710 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35711 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35712 Code box as described in the previous
35716 \begin_layout Standard
35717 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35718 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35721 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35723 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35731 \begin_layout Standard
35732 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35738 \begin_layout Standard
35742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35752 \begin_inset Note Note
35755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35756 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35764 \begin_layout Left Header
35765 \begin_inset Argument 1
35768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35788 \begin_inset Note Note
35791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35792 defines the header line as described below
35800 \begin_layout Center Header
35801 \begin_inset Argument 1
35804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 \begin_layout Right Header
35814 \begin_inset Argument 1
35817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35838 \begin_layout Left Footer
35839 \begin_inset Argument 1
35842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35863 \begin_layout Center Footer
35864 \begin_inset Argument 1
35867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35879 \begin_inset Newline newline
35883 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35889 \begin_layout Right Footer
35890 \begin_inset Argument 1
35893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35915 \begin_layout Section
35916 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35919 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35924 \begin_inset Index idx
35927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35928 Document ! Header/Footer line
35934 \begin_inset Index idx
35937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35946 \begin_layout Standard
35947 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35951 \begin_inset space ~
35962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35974 As a second step add in the menu
35976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35977 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35986 Custom Header/Footerlines
35989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35993 This module offers the following 6
35994 \begin_inset space ~
36000 \begin_layout Description
36002 \begin_inset space ~
36006 \begin_inset space ~
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36014 \begin_inset space ~
36018 \begin_inset space ~
36024 \begin_layout Description
36026 \begin_inset space ~
36030 \begin_inset space ~
36034 \begin_inset space ~
36038 \begin_inset space ~
36042 \begin_inset space ~
36048 \begin_layout Standard
36049 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36050 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36053 \begin_layout Standard
36054 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36055 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36057 \begin_inset space ~
36061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36063 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36067 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36070 \begin_layout Standard
36071 \begin_inset Float figure
36078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36081 \begin_inset Tabular
36082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36084 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36086 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36088 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36106 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36117 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36135 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36146 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36150 The normal text on the page goes here.
36151 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36153 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36154 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36159 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36168 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36197 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36208 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36226 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36244 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36249 name "fig:Page-layout"
36253 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36266 \begin_layout Standard
36267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36275 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36279 \begin_inset space ~
36284 is set to “Default”.
36285 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36294 \begin_layout Subsection
36298 \begin_layout Standard
36299 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36300 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36301 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36302 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36304 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36306 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36309 \begin_layout Standard
36310 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36311 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36317 \begin_inset space ~
36325 \begin_layout Description
36328 thepage prints the current page number
36331 \begin_layout Description
36334 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36337 \begin_layout Description
36340 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36343 \begin_layout Description
36346 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36347 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36354 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36357 because it usually goes in a left header.
36360 \begin_layout Description
36363 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36364 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36366 It is normally used in the right header.
36369 \begin_layout Subsection
36370 Default header/footer
36373 \begin_layout Standard
36374 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36375 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36376 footer has the page number.
36377 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36378 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36379 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36390 \begin_layout Subsection
36394 \begin_layout Standard
36395 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36396 Some pages are different.
36397 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36398 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36399 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36400 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36401 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36405 Header and footer decoration line
36408 \begin_layout Standard
36409 By default, you get a 0.4
36410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36413 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36414 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36426 in the following way:
36429 \begin_layout Standard
36436 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36439 \begin_layout Standard
36440 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36453 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36460 \begin_layout Standard
36461 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36463 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36464 \begin_inset space ~
36468 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36479 Several header/footer lines
36482 \begin_layout Standard
36483 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36484 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36485 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36487 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36503 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36505 \begin_inset space ~
36513 \begin_layout Standard
36520 headheight}{height}
36523 \begin_layout Standard
36528 is a size in standard units (e.
36529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36533 \begin_inset space \space{}
36541 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36542 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36543 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36544 logfile with the menu
36546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36548 \begin_inset space ~
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36561 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36566 \begin_inset Index idx
36569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36571 packages ! fancyhdr
36577 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36578 for your header/footer.
36581 \begin_layout Subsection
36585 \begin_layout Standard
36586 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36587 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36588 This example consists of the following definition:
36591 \begin_layout Description
36593 \begin_inset space ~
36602 , empty optional argument
36605 \begin_layout Description
36607 \begin_inset space ~
36610 Header empty, empty optional argument
36613 \begin_layout Description
36615 \begin_inset space ~
36624 in the optional argument
36627 \begin_layout Description
36629 \begin_inset space ~
36638 in the optional argument
36641 \begin_layout Description
36643 \begin_inset space ~
36656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36660 \begin_inset Newline newline
36664 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36671 in the optional argument
36674 \begin_layout Description
36676 \begin_inset space ~
36685 , empty optional argument
36688 \begin_layout Description
36691 headrulewidth set to 2
36692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36698 \begin_layout Standard
36699 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36700 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36706 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36716 \begin_layout Standard
36717 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36723 \begin_layout Standard
36727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36731 pagestyle{headings}
36737 \begin_inset Note Note
36740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36741 switches back to page style with the default headings
36749 \begin_layout Section
36750 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36753 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36758 \begin_inset Index idx
36761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36768 \begin_inset Index idx
36771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36780 \begin_layout Standard
36782 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36783 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36784 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36787 \begin_layout Subsection
36791 \begin_layout Standard
36792 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36798 \begin_inset Index idx
36801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36803 packages ! preview-latex
36808 (on some systems named simply
36813 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36815 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36822 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36824 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36832 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36833 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36834 -package are automatically
36835 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36839 \begin_layout Subsection
36843 \begin_layout Standard
36844 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36845 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36847 activate the option
36850 \begin_inset space ~
36857 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36863 \begin_inset space ~
36867 \begin_inset space ~
36870 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36877 \begin_inset space ~
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36895 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36898 \begin_layout Standard
36899 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36904 \begin_inset space ~
36912 \begin_inset space ~
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36921 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36922 and when you finish
36926 \begin_layout Standard
36927 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36935 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36936 generated by activating the option
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36945 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36953 \begin_layout Subsection
36954 Selected document parts
36957 \begin_layout Standard
36958 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36959 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36960 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36961 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36963 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36969 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36970 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36971 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36974 \begin_layout Standard
36975 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36982 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36994 is explained in section
36996 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37001 \begin_inset space ~
37011 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37012 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37013 the final rotated boxes,
37014 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37015 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37017 Here is the result:
37020 \begin_layout Standard
37021 \begin_inset Preview
37023 \begin_layout Standard
37028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37032 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37038 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37048 height_special "totalheight"
37053 backgroundcolor "none"
37056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37081 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37087 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37109 \begin_layout Standard
37110 Previewing works also for colors.
37111 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37130 is explained in section
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37150 \begin_layout Standard
37151 \begin_inset Preview
37153 \begin_layout Standard
37157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37176 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37181 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37200 \begin_layout Standard
37201 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37207 \begin_layout Standard
37208 If \SpecialChar LyX
37209 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37210 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37211 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37212 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37213 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37214 the \SpecialChar TeX
37216 If \SpecialChar LyX
37217 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37218 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37220 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37221 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37222 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37225 \begin_layout Subsection
37230 \begin_layout Standard
37231 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37232 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37235 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37237 \begin_inset space ~
37242 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37244 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37246 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37247 's main window, then only this selection
37248 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37249 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37250 the source view window.
37255 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37256 ; but note that if you have
37257 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37259 not just the one which is open at the time.
37262 \begin_layout Section
37263 Advanced Find and Replace
37264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37266 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37271 \begin_inset Index idx
37274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37281 \begin_inset Index idx
37284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37293 \begin_layout Subsection
37297 \begin_layout Standard
37298 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37299 allows for searching of complex,
37300 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37302 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37303 The key-features are:
37306 \begin_layout Itemize
37307 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37308 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37309 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37313 \begin_layout Itemize
37314 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37315 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37316 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37317 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37320 \begin_layout Itemize
37321 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37322 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37323 outside of mathematics environments
37326 \begin_layout Itemize
37327 Search may be widened to a specific
37332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37336 \begin_inset space ~
37339 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37340 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37347 \begin_layout Itemize
37348 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37349 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37357 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37360 \begin_layout Subsection
37364 \begin_layout Standard
37365 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37367 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37380 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37383 ) or the toolbar button
37386 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37392 Advanced Find and Replace
37397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37401 \begin_layout Standard
37407 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37416 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37419 arg "paragraph-break"
37423 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37424 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37428 arg "paragraph-break"
37431 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37435 searches backwards.
37438 \begin_layout Standard
37442 \begin_inset space ~
37447 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37461 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37465 Searching for mathematics
37468 \begin_layout Standard
37469 Mathematical formulas, such as
37470 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37473 or something more complex like
37474 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37477 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37482 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37483 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37484 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37485 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37495 \begin_layout Standard
37496 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37497 This is done by switching to the
37501 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37506 This way, entering in the
37513 \begin_layout Itemize
37514 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37515 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37518 \begin_layout Itemize
37519 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37520 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37523 \begin_layout Itemize
37524 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37525 of it only within section headings.
37526 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37527 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37531 \begin_layout Itemize
37532 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37533 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37540 \begin_layout Standard
37541 The entries made in the
37545 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37554 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37558 button or alternatively press
37561 arg "paragraph-break"
37568 while the cursor is in the
37571 \begin_inset space ~
37579 \begin_layout Standard
37580 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37582 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37586 \begin_layout Itemize
37587 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37588 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37596 with its typewriter version
37597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37611 \begin_layout Itemize
37612 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37618 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37630 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37637 (you may want to enable the
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset space ~
37653 options and disable the
37661 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37669 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37670 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37674 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37677 , or occurrences of
37678 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37682 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37688 \begin_layout Subsection
37692 \begin_layout Standard
37693 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37698 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37700 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37702 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37712 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37718 This is done with the context menu
37720 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37721 Insert Regular Expression
37723 while the cursor is in the
37728 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37729 expression matching rules
37733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37734 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37741 \begin_inset space ~
37744 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37745 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37751 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37752 same text in the document.
37753 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37754 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37757 \begin_layout Enumerate
37758 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37763 editor the fraction
37764 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37768 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37771 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37772 fractions with the given denominator.
37775 \begin_layout Enumerate
37776 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37788 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37793 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37794 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37795 Also, by inserting a
37796 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37799 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37800 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37805 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37806 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37809 , and referring back to them through
37810 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37814 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37818 For example, try searching with the regexp
37819 \begin_inset Newline newline
37822 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37825 \begin_inset Newline newline
37828 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37835 \begin_layout Standard
37836 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37844 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37845 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37846 sub-expressions is absolute.
37848 \begin_inset space ~
37852 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37855 always refers to the first occurrence of
37856 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37859 in all entered regexps.
37867 \begin_layout Section
37869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37871 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37876 \begin_inset Index idx
37879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37888 \begin_layout Standard
37890 has a built-in spell checker.
37893 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37900 key or the toolbar button
37903 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37906 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37907 beginning of the currently selected text.
37908 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37909 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37910 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37911 scrolled so that it is visible.
37912 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37913 n, if any could be found.
37914 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37918 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37919 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37923 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37926 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37930 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37931 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37933 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37934 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37937 \begin_inset space ~
37945 arg "dialog-show character"
37948 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37950 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37953 \begin_layout Standard
37954 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37955 can be downloaded from here:
37956 \begin_inset Newline newline
37960 \begin_inset Flex URL
37963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37965 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37971 \begin_inset Newline newline
37975 \begin_inset space ~
37978 files for each language.
37979 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37980 \begin_inset space ~
37983 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37984 's installation subfolder
37992 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37994 \begin_inset Newline newline
37997 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37998 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37999 but in most cases these are
38015 is the language code.
38018 \begin_layout Subsection
38022 \begin_layout Standard
38025 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38026 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38031 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38034 you can set the following things:
38037 \begin_layout Description
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38042 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38043 should use for spell checking.
38044 Depending on your platform,
38054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38055 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38056 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38071 \begin_inset space ~
38074 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38077 \begin_layout Description
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38082 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38083 will always use the given language
38084 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38087 \begin_layout Description
38089 \begin_inset space ~
38092 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38098 \begin_inset space \space{}
38102 This should normally not be needed.
38105 \begin_layout Description
38107 \begin_inset space ~
38111 \begin_inset space ~
38114 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38126 \begin_layout Description
38128 \begin_inset space ~
38131 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38132 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38133 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38134 appear in a context menu.
38135 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38139 \begin_layout Description
38141 \begin_inset space ~
38145 \begin_inset space ~
38149 \begin_inset space ~
38152 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38156 \begin_layout Section
38158 \begin_inset Index idx
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38170 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38177 \begin_layout Standard
38179 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38180 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38190 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38192 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38202 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38204 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38205 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38206 which are available for many languages.
38209 \begin_layout Standard
38210 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38211 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38215 \begin_layout Subsection
38216 Setting up the thesaurus
38219 \begin_layout Standard
38228 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38232 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38237 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38243 \begin_inset space ~
38251 For instance, the US English files are named:
38254 \begin_layout Itemize
38258 \begin_layout Itemize
38262 \begin_layout Standard
38271 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38272 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38275 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38276 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38277 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38279 \begin_inset space ~
38284 ) to the path where they are installed.
38288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38289 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38290 ies, typical locations are
38296 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38300 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38304 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38307 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38313 LibreOffice-<Version>
38320 On the Mac, the default location is
38322 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38323 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38324 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38325 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38326 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38327 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38335 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38336 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38337 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38341 \begin_layout Standard
38342 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38343 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
38345 \begin_inset Newline newline
38349 \begin_inset Flex URL
38352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38354 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38362 \begin_layout Standard
38363 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38364 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38366 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38367 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38368 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38375 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38377 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38378 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38382 \begin_layout Standard
38383 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38385 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38388 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38394 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38397 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38398 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38406 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38407 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38408 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38410 \begin_inset space ~
38415 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38418 \begin_layout Subsection
38419 Using the thesaurus
38422 \begin_layout Standard
38423 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38425 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38428 or the toolbar button
38431 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38434 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38436 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38438 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38439 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38440 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38449 ), related terms (such as
38452 \begin_inset space ~
38461 ), compounds (such as
38464 \begin_inset space ~
38473 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38482 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38485 \begin_layout Standard
38486 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38487 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38491 \begin_layout Standard
38492 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38493 the dictionary, such as the above
38497 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38502 \begin_inset space \space{}
38505 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38506 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38507 For example, looking up the word form
38511 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38516 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38521 \begin_inset space \space{}
38532 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38533 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38534 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38537 \begin_layout Section
38539 \begin_inset Index idx
38542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38549 \begin_inset Index idx
38552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38553 Document ! Change Tracking
38559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38561 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38568 \begin_layout Standard
38569 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38570 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38571 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38572 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38574 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38576 \begin_inset space ~
38579 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38581 \begin_inset space ~
38589 \begin_layout Standard
38590 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38604 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38605 You can change the color in
38607 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38608 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38610 \begin_inset space ~
38614 \begin_inset space ~
38619 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38625 \begin_inset Index idx
38628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38629 Color ! Change tracking
38634 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38635 's status bar when the
38636 cursor is in changed text.
38637 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38640 arg "changes-merge"
38646 \begin_layout Standard
38647 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38649 \begin_inset Index idx
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38661 \begin_layout Standard
38662 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38668 \begin_layout Standard
38669 \begin_inset Graphics
38670 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38678 \begin_layout Standard
38679 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38685 \begin_layout Standard
38686 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38689 \begin_layout Standard
38690 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38696 \begin_layout Standard
38697 \begin_inset Tabular
38698 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38699 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38700 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38701 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38711 arg "changes-track"
38719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38725 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38730 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38732 \begin_inset space ~
38741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 arg "changes-output"
38758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38766 \begin_inset space ~
38769 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38771 \begin_inset space ~
38775 \begin_inset space ~
38779 \begin_inset space ~
38788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38809 Jumps to the next change
38815 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38824 arg "change-accept"
38832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38840 \begin_inset space ~
38843 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38845 \begin_inset space ~
38854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38863 arg "change-reject"
38871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38879 \begin_inset space ~
38882 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38884 \begin_inset space ~
38893 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 arg "changes-merge"
38910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38916 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38918 \begin_inset space ~
38921 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38923 \begin_inset space ~
38932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38941 arg "all-changes-accept"
38949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38957 \begin_inset space ~
38960 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38962 \begin_inset space ~
38966 \begin_inset space ~
38975 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38984 arg "all-changes-reject"
38992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39003 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39005 \begin_inset space ~
39009 \begin_inset space ~
39018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39042 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39044 \begin_inset space ~
39053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39076 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39094 \begin_layout Standard
39095 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39101 \begin_layout Standard
39102 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39122 \begin_layout Standard
39123 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39124 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39125 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39126 the next change after the current cursor position.
39127 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39128 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39129 step to the next change.
39130 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39133 \begin_layout Standard
39134 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39135 to describe a change.
39138 \begin_layout Standard
39140 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39141 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39147 \begin_inset Index idx
39150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39158 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39167 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39173 \begin_layout Section
39174 Comparison of Documents
39175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39177 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39182 \begin_inset Index idx
39185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 Comparison of documents
39194 \begin_layout Standard
39195 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39202 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39203 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39205 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39207 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39211 \begin_inset space ~
39215 \begin_inset space ~
39219 \begin_inset space ~
39228 \begin_inset space ~
39232 \begin_inset space ~
39236 \begin_inset space ~
39240 \begin_inset space ~
39244 \begin_inset space ~
39248 \begin_inset space ~
39253 enables the change tracking option
39256 \begin_inset space ~
39260 \begin_inset space ~
39264 \begin_inset space ~
39269 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39272 \begin_layout Section
39273 International Support
39274 \begin_inset Index idx
39277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39278 International support
39286 \begin_layout Standard
39287 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39288 with any language you want.
39289 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39290 up \SpecialChar LyX
39292 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39294 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39302 \begin_layout Standard
39303 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39304 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39305 \begin_inset space ~
39309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39311 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39318 \begin_layout Subsection
39320 \begin_inset Index idx
39323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39330 \begin_inset Index idx
39333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39334 Document ! Settings
39340 \begin_inset Index idx
39343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39344 Document ! Language
39352 \begin_layout Standard
39355 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39356 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39359 dialog lets you set
39361 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39366 \begin_layout Standard
39371 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39376 \begin_inset space ~
39381 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39382 For details about the different encoding options see section
39383 \begin_inset space ~
39387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39389 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39396 \begin_layout Subsection
39397 Keyboard mapping configuration
39398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39400 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39407 \begin_layout Standard
39408 If you have for example a U.
39409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39412 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39413 can use an alternate keymap.
39414 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39419 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39420 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39421 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39424 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39425 \begin_inset space ~
39429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39431 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39436 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39437 which one you want to use.
39440 \begin_layout Standard
39441 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39442 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39443 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39447 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39448 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39449 one to support the characters you want.
39450 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39457 \begin_layout Chapter
39460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39462 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39469 \begin_layout Standard
39470 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39471 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39472 topic inside the user's guide.
39475 \begin_layout Section
39477 \begin_inset Index idx
39480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39489 \begin_layout Standard
39494 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39497 \begin_layout Subsection
39501 \begin_layout Standard
39502 Creates a new document.
39505 \begin_layout Subsection
39509 \begin_layout Standard
39510 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39511 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39512 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39514 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39515 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39521 \begin_layout Subsection
39525 \begin_layout Standard
39529 \begin_layout Subsection
39533 \begin_layout Standard
39534 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39535 Click there on a file to open it.
39538 \begin_layout Subsection
39540 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39544 \begin_layout Standard
39546 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39547 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39551 \begin_layout Subsection
39555 \begin_layout Standard
39556 Closes the current document.
39559 \begin_layout Subsection
39563 \begin_layout Standard
39564 Closes all opened documents.
39567 \begin_layout Subsection
39571 \begin_layout Standard
39572 Saves the actual document.
39575 \begin_layout Subsection
39579 \begin_layout Standard
39580 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39581 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39585 \begin_layout Subsection
39587 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39591 \begin_layout Standard
39593 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39594 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39600 \begin_layout Subsection
39604 \begin_layout Standard
39605 Saves all opened documents.
39608 \begin_layout Subsection
39612 \begin_layout Standard
39613 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39616 \begin_layout Subsection
39620 \begin_layout Standard
39621 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39622 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39623 It is described in the section
39625 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39630 Additional Features
39635 \begin_layout Subsection
39639 \begin_layout Standard
39640 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39641 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39643 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39644 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39648 \begin_layout Standard
39649 When using the menu entry
39652 \begin_inset space ~
39657 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39661 \begin_inset space ~
39665 \begin_inset space ~
39669 \begin_inset space ~
39674 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39675 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39678 \begin_layout Subsection
39680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39682 name "subsec:Export"
39689 \begin_layout Standard
39690 You can export your document to various file formats.
39691 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39693 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39694 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39695 during its configuration.
39698 \begin_layout Standard
39699 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39701 \begin_inset space ~
39705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39707 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39714 \begin_layout Description
39720 \begin_inset space ~
39723 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39728 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39729 \begin_inset Newline newline
39732 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39733 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39737 \begin_layout Description
39738 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39744 \begin_layout Description
39746 \begin_inset space ~
39749 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39755 \begin_layout Description
39756 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39757 's native DVI-format.
39758 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39759 files paths or file names in your document.
39761 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39768 \begin_layout Description
39769 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39770 in files paths or file names
39773 \begin_layout Description
39775 \begin_inset space ~
39782 ) DVI-format using the program
39784 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39787 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39791 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39799 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39807 \begin_layout Description
39809 \begin_inset space ~
39812 (cropped) the same as
39816 but with cropped page margins.
39819 \begin_layout Description
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39824 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39828 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39833 \begin_layout Description
39837 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39845 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39853 \begin_layout Description
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39859 \begin_inset space ~
39862 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39866 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39874 \begin_layout Description
39878 \begin_inset space ~
39887 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39888 source that is compilable with the program
39890 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39894 \begin_layout Description
39898 \begin_inset space ~
39903 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39904 source, additionally all images used in the document
39905 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39909 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39912 \begin_layout Description
39916 \begin_inset space ~
39921 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39922 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39923 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39931 \begin_layout Description
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39944 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39945 source that is compilable with the program
39951 \begin_layout Description
39953 \begin_inset space ~
39957 \begin_inset space ~
39964 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39965 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39971 \begin_layout Description
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39976 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39977 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39983 \begin_inset space \space{}
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40007 represent the version number)
40010 \begin_layout Description
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40019 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40020 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40021 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40025 \begin_layout Description
40026 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40027 's internal XHTML engine
40030 \begin_layout Description
40032 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40040 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_inset space ~
40047 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40052 For the conversion the program
40061 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40064 \begin_layout Description
40065 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40070 \begin_layout Description
40072 \begin_inset space ~
40075 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40077 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40080 For the conversion the program
40089 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40092 \begin_layout Description
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40097 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40098 For the conversion the program
40107 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40110 \begin_layout Description
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40115 (cropped) the same as
40118 \begin_inset space ~
40123 but with cropped page margins
40126 \begin_layout Description
40130 \begin_inset space ~
40135 PDF-format using the program
40139 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40142 \begin_layout Description
40146 \begin_inset space ~
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40158 \begin_inset space ~
40163 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40168 \begin_inset space \space{}
40171 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40175 \begin_layout Description
40179 \begin_inset space ~
40184 PDF-format using the program
40186 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40189 , produces PDF-files directly
40192 \begin_layout Description
40196 \begin_inset space ~
40201 PDF-format using the program
40205 , produces PDF-files directly
40208 \begin_layout Description
40212 \begin_inset space ~
40217 PDF-format using the program
40221 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40224 \begin_layout Description
40228 \begin_inset space ~
40233 PDF-format using the program
40238 , produces PDF-files directly
40241 \begin_layout Description
40245 \begin_inset space ~
40253 \begin_layout Description
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40261 \begin_inset space ~
40266 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40267 and then exported as text using the program
40272 \begin_layout Description
40277 PostScript format using the program
40285 options see section
40286 \begin_inset space ~
40290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40292 reference "subsec:General-output"
40299 \begin_layout Description
40300 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40301 source and also code in the statistical programming
40315 it is possible to use
40319 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40323 \begin_layout Standard
40324 If one of the menu entries
40331 \begin_inset space ~
40340 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40342 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40350 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40355 \begin_inset Index idx
40358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40359 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40368 \begin_layout Subsection
40372 \begin_layout Standard
40373 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40374 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40377 \begin_inset space ~
40381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40383 reference "sec:Paths"
40388 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40397 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40398 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40399 's preferences as described in section
40400 \begin_inset space ~
40404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40406 reference "subsec:Converters"
40413 \begin_layout Subsection
40414 New and Close Window
40417 \begin_layout Standard
40418 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40422 \begin_layout Subsection
40426 \begin_layout Standard
40427 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40430 \begin_layout Section
40432 \begin_inset Index idx
40435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40444 \begin_layout Subsection
40448 \begin_layout Standard
40449 Described in section
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40456 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40463 \begin_layout Subsection
40464 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40467 \begin_layout Standard
40468 Described in section
40469 \begin_inset space ~
40473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40475 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40482 \begin_layout Subsection
40486 \begin_layout Standard
40487 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40488 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40491 \begin_layout Subsection
40495 \begin_layout Standard
40496 Selects the whole document.
40499 \begin_layout Subsection
40500 Find & Replace (Quick)
40503 \begin_layout Standard
40504 Described in section
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40511 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40518 \begin_layout Subsection
40519 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40522 \begin_layout Standard
40523 Described in section
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40530 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40537 \begin_layout Subsection
40538 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40541 \begin_layout Standard
40542 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40546 \begin_layout Subsection
40548 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40552 \begin_layout Standard
40554 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40555 Described in section
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40562 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40571 \begin_layout Subsection
40573 \begin_inset Index idx
40576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40577 Paragraph ! Settings
40585 \begin_layout Standard
40586 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40587 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40591 \begin_layout Standard
40592 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40593 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40600 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40602 \begin_inset space ~
40608 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40612 \begin_layout Subsection
40614 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40620 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40621 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40626 \begin_layout Enumerate
40628 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40629 Customize text properties by means of the
40635 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40638 ; this is described in section
40639 \begin_inset space ~
40643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40645 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40652 \begin_layout Enumerate
40654 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40655 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40657 Apply last settings
40660 \begin_layout Enumerate
40662 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40663 Change the casing of selected text (
40678 \begin_layout Subsection
40680 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40684 \begin_layout Standard
40686 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40687 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40688 text styles (in the case of this document:
40710 \begin_inset space ~
40714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40716 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40725 \begin_layout Subsection
40726 Table and Rows & Columns
40729 \begin_layout Standard
40730 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40731 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40732 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40735 \begin_layout Subsection
40739 \begin_layout Standard
40740 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40741 It will dissolve this inset.
40742 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40746 \begin_layout Subsection
40750 \begin_layout Standard
40751 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40752 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40755 \begin_layout Subsection
40756 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40759 \begin_layout Standard
40760 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40762 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40763 \begin_inset space ~
40767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40769 reference "sec:Nesting"
40774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40776 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40783 \begin_layout Section
40785 \begin_inset Index idx
40788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40797 \begin_layout Standard
40798 At the bottom of the
40802 menu the opened documents are listed.
40805 \begin_layout Subsection
40806 Open/Close all Insets
40809 \begin_layout Standard
40810 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40813 \begin_layout Subsection
40814 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40817 \begin_layout Standard
40818 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40821 \begin_layout Standard
40822 Math macros are described in the
40829 \begin_layout Subsection
40833 \begin_layout Standard
40834 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40835 \begin_inset space ~
40839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40841 reference "sec:Navigating"
40846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40848 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40855 \begin_layout Subsection
40859 \begin_layout Standard
40860 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40862 \begin_inset space ~
40866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40868 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40875 \begin_layout Subsection
40879 \begin_layout Standard
40880 Opens a window showing console messages.
40881 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40886 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40887 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40888 is processing the document.
40891 \begin_layout Subsection
40893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40895 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40900 \begin_inset Index idx
40903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40912 \begin_layout Standard
40913 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40915 All toolbars and the
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40923 can be turned on and off.
40928 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40957 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40961 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40968 \begin_layout Standard
40973 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40977 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40978 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40979 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40980 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40981 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40984 \begin_layout Standard
40986 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40993 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41000 \begin_layout Subsection
41004 \begin_layout Standard
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41012 \begin_inset space ~
41016 \begin_inset space ~
41020 \begin_inset space ~
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41033 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41034 's main window vertically while
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41041 \begin_inset space ~
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41062 will split it horizontally.
41063 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41064 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41065 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41066 three or more documents at the same time.
41067 To close a split view, use the menu
41070 \begin_inset space ~
41074 \begin_inset space ~
41082 \begin_layout Subsection
41086 \begin_layout Standard
41087 Closes a split view.
41090 \begin_layout Subsection
41094 \begin_layout Standard
41095 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41096 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41097 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41098 's main window fullscreen.
41099 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41100 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41103 \begin_layout Section
41105 \begin_inset Index idx
41108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41117 \begin_layout Subsection
41121 \begin_layout Standard
41122 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41129 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41140 \begin_layout Subsection
41142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41144 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41151 \begin_layout Standard
41152 Here you can insert the following characters:
41155 \begin_layout Description
41160 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41163 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41164 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41165 -packages you have installed.
41166 You can get a complete display by checking
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41175 \begin_inset Newline newline
41179 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41187 Not all characters will be visible in the
41191 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41192 dialog (see section
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41199 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41203 ) can display every character.
41211 \begin_layout Description
41212 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41216 \begin_layout Description
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41225 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41232 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41239 \begin_layout Description
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41244 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41247 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41248 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41254 \begin_layout Description
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41259 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41263 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41269 \begin_layout Description
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41274 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41278 \begin_layout Description
41280 \begin_inset space ~
41283 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41287 \begin_layout Description
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41293 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41294 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41300 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41305 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41311 \begin_inset space \space{}
41314 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41315 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41324 To insert a fraction use the command
41329 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41333 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41342 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41349 \begin_layout Description
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41354 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41358 \begin_layout Description
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41364 \begin_inset Index idx
41367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41374 \begin_inset Index idx
41377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41378 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41383 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41384 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41386 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41392 \begin_inset Index idx
41395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41403 \begin_inset Newline newline
41406 More information about this feature can be found in the
41412 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41418 \begin_layout Description
41419 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41421 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41422 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41426 \begin_layout Subsection
41430 \begin_layout Standard
41431 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41434 \begin_layout Description
41435 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41436 \begin_inset script superscript
41438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41447 \begin_layout Description
41448 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41449 \begin_inset script subscript
41451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41460 \begin_layout Description
41462 \begin_inset space ~
41465 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41466 \begin_inset space ~
41470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41472 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41479 \begin_layout Description
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41484 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41485 \begin_inset space ~
41489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41491 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41498 \begin_layout Description
41500 \begin_inset space ~
41503 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41510 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41517 \begin_layout Description
41519 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41524 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41530 \begin_inset space \space{}
41533 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41534 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41543 To insert a fraction use the command
41548 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41552 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41561 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41570 \begin_layout Description
41572 \begin_inset space ~
41575 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41582 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41589 \begin_layout Description
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41594 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41601 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41608 \begin_layout Description
41610 \begin_inset space ~
41613 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41614 \begin_inset space ~
41618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41620 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41627 \begin_layout Description
41628 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41629 \begin_inset space ~
41633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41635 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41642 \begin_layout Description
41644 \begin_inset space ~
41647 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41654 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41661 \begin_layout Description
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41666 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41673 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41680 \begin_layout Description
41682 \begin_inset space ~
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41689 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41692 \begin_inset space ~
41696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41698 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41705 for a usage example.
41708 \begin_layout Description
41710 \begin_inset space ~
41714 \begin_inset space ~
41717 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41718 \begin_inset space ~
41722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41724 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41731 \begin_layout Description
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41736 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41737 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41740 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41747 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41754 \begin_layout Description
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41759 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41766 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41773 \begin_layout Description
41775 \begin_inset space ~
41778 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41779 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41787 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41794 \begin_layout Description
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41799 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41806 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41813 \begin_layout Description
41815 \begin_inset space ~
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41822 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41829 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41836 \begin_layout Subsection
41838 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41842 \begin_layout Standard
41844 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41845 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41846 The submenu allows you to insert
41849 \begin_layout Description
41851 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41856 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41859 \begin_layout Description
41861 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41867 \begin_inset space ~
41870 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41874 \begin_layout Description
41876 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41878 \begin_inset space ~
41881 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41884 \begin_layout Description
41886 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41891 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41894 \begin_layout Description
41896 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41898 \begin_inset space ~
41902 \begin_inset space ~
41905 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41909 \begin_layout Description
41911 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41913 \begin_inset space ~
41916 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41919 \begin_layout Description
41921 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41923 \begin_inset space ~
41927 \begin_inset space ~
41931 \begin_inset space ~
41934 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41937 \begin_layout Description
41939 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41944 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41946 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41947 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41953 \begin_layout Description
41955 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41960 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41962 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41963 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41969 \begin_layout Description
41971 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41972 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41973 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41974 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41977 \begin_layout Subsection
41980 List/Contents/References
41983 \begin_layout Standard
41984 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41988 \begin_inset space ~
42009 are described in section
42010 \begin_inset space ~
42014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42016 reference "sec:toc"
42025 is described in section
42026 \begin_inset space ~
42030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42032 reference "sec:Index"
42040 is described in section
42041 \begin_inset space ~
42045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42047 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42053 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42056 is described in section
42057 \begin_inset space ~
42061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42063 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42070 \begin_layout Subsection
42074 \begin_layout Standard
42075 To insert floats, as described in section
42076 \begin_inset space ~
42080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42082 reference "sec:Floats"
42086 and in detail the chapter
42093 \begin_inset space ~
42101 \begin_layout Subsection
42105 \begin_layout Standard
42106 To insert notes, described in section
42107 \begin_inset space ~
42111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42113 reference "sec:Notes"
42120 \begin_layout Subsection
42124 \begin_layout Standard
42125 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42127 Branches are described in section
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42134 reference "sec:Branches"
42141 \begin_layout Subsection
42145 \begin_layout Standard
42146 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42147 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42149 An example is the document class
42150 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42160 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42169 with three custom insets.
42172 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42176 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42182 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42185 \begin_layout Subsection
42187 \begin_inset Index idx
42190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42199 \begin_layout Standard
42200 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42202 For more information see chapter
42204 External Document Parts
42207 \begin_inset space ~
42213 \begin_layout Subsection
42215 \begin_inset Index idx
42218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42227 \begin_layout Standard
42228 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42229 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42244 \begin_layout Subsection
42248 \begin_layout Standard
42253 dialog as described in section
42254 \begin_inset space ~
42258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42260 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42267 \begin_layout Subsection
42271 \begin_layout Standard
42276 as described in section
42277 \begin_inset space ~
42281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42283 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42290 \begin_layout Subsection
42294 \begin_layout Standard
42299 as described in section
42300 \begin_inset space ~
42304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42306 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42313 \begin_layout Subsection
42315 \begin_inset Index idx
42318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42325 \begin_inset Index idx
42328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42329 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42337 \begin_layout Standard
42338 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42339 Floats are described in section
42340 \begin_inset space ~
42344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42346 reference "sec:Floats"
42350 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42353 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42361 \begin_inset space ~
42369 \begin_layout Subsection
42373 \begin_layout Standard
42374 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42375 \begin_inset space ~
42379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42381 reference "sec:Index"
42388 \begin_layout Subsection
42392 \begin_layout Standard
42393 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42394 \begin_inset space ~
42398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42400 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42407 \begin_layout Subsection
42411 \begin_layout Standard
42412 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42413 Tables are described in section
42414 \begin_inset space ~
42418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42420 reference "sec:Tables"
42424 and in detail in the chapter
42431 \begin_inset space ~
42439 \begin_layout Subsection
42443 \begin_layout Standard
42449 Graphics are described in section
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42456 reference "sec:Graphics"
42463 \begin_layout Subsection
42467 \begin_layout Standard
42468 Inserts a URL as described in section
42469 \begin_inset space ~
42473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42475 reference "subsec:URLs"
42482 \begin_layout Subsection
42486 \begin_layout Standard
42487 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42488 \begin_inset space ~
42492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42494 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42501 \begin_layout Subsection
42505 \begin_layout Standard
42506 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42513 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42520 \begin_layout Subsection
42524 \begin_layout Standard
42525 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42526 \begin_inset space ~
42530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42532 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42539 \begin_layout Subsection
42542 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42545 \begin_layout Standard
42546 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42547 environments of the same type.
42549 \begin_inset space ~
42553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42555 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42559 for an explanation.
42562 \begin_layout Subsection
42566 \begin_layout Standard
42567 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42568 title or caption of a float.
42569 Inserts a short title as described in section
42570 \begin_inset space ~
42574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42576 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42583 \begin_layout Subsection
42588 \begin_layout Standard
42589 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42590 Code box as described in section
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42597 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42604 \begin_layout Subsection
42606 \begin_inset Index idx
42609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42618 \begin_layout Standard
42619 Inserts a program listings box.
42620 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42622 Program Code Listings
42627 \begin_inset space ~
42635 \begin_layout Subsection
42637 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42641 \begin_layout Standard
42643 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42644 Inserts the actual date.
42645 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42652 \begin_layout Subsection
42656 \begin_layout Standard
42657 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42658 \begin_inset space ~
42662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42664 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42671 \begin_layout Section
42673 \begin_inset Index idx
42676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42685 \begin_layout Standard
42686 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42690 of the current document.
42691 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42694 \begin_layout Subsection
42698 \begin_layout Standard
42699 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42700 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42701 to jump, for example, between section
42702 \begin_inset space ~
42706 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42707 \begin_inset space ~
42710 2.5 and use the submenu
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42717 \begin_inset space ~
42724 \begin_inset space ~
42730 \begin_inset space ~
42734 \begin_inset space ~
42740 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42744 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42750 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42753 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42756 \begin_layout Standard
42757 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42761 \begin_inset space ~
42766 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42769 \begin_inset space ~
42774 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42777 \begin_layout Subsection
42778 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42781 \begin_layout Standard
42782 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42786 \begin_layout Subsection
42790 \begin_layout Standard
42791 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42792 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42793 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42797 \begin_inset space ~
42801 \begin_inset space ~
42809 \begin_layout Subsection
42813 \begin_layout Standard
42814 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42817 The \SpecialChar LyX
42818 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42820 \begin_inset space ~
42828 \begin_inset space ~
42833 manual for a detailed description.
42836 \begin_layout Section
42838 \begin_inset Index idx
42841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42850 \begin_layout Subsection
42854 \begin_layout Standard
42855 Change Tracking is described in section
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42862 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42869 \begin_layout Subsection
42877 \begin_layout Standard
42878 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42879 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42880 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42882 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42883 to the clipboard or update the view.
42884 \begin_inset Newline newline
42887 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42894 Open Containing Directory
42896 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42897 's temporary folder for the document.
42898 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42899 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42900 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42901 For example some journals require to send the
42905 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42909 \begin_layout Subsection
42910 Start Appendix Here
42913 \begin_layout Standard
42914 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42915 as described in section
42916 \begin_inset space ~
42920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42922 reference "sec:Appendices"
42929 \begin_layout Subsection
42931 \begin_inset space ~
42937 \begin_layout Standard
42938 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42939 default output format for the document (menu
42941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42942 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42943 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42945 \begin_inset space ~
42949 \begin_inset space ~
42955 \begin_inset space ~
42959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42961 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42965 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42968 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42969 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42971 \begin_inset space ~
42974 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42976 \begin_inset space ~
42979 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42981 \begin_inset space ~
42985 \begin_inset space ~
42991 \begin_inset space ~
42995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42997 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43001 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43002 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43004 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43005 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43007 \begin_inset space ~
43010 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43012 \begin_inset space ~
43015 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43019 \begin_inset space ~
43023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43025 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43030 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43031 when it is first configured.
43032 The default output format is
43035 \begin_inset space ~
43043 \begin_layout Subsection
43044 View (Other Formats)
43047 \begin_layout Standard
43048 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43049 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43050 actual document with an external program.
43051 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43052 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43053 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43055 All possible formats are listed in section
43056 \begin_inset space ~
43060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43062 reference "subsec:Export"
43067 You should at least see the menu entry
43072 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43074 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43082 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43087 \begin_inset Index idx
43090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43091 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43100 \begin_layout Standard
43101 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43102 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43104 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43105 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43107 \begin_inset space ~
43110 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43112 \begin_inset space ~
43115 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43119 \begin_inset space ~
43123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43125 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43130 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43131 when it is first configured.
43134 \begin_layout Subsection
43136 \begin_inset space ~
43142 \begin_layout Standard
43143 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43144 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43147 \begin_layout Subsection
43148 Update (Other Formats)
43151 \begin_layout Standard
43152 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43153 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43156 \begin_layout Subsection
43157 View Master Document
43160 \begin_layout Standard
43161 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43177 \begin_inset space ~
43182 manual for more information on this topic).
43183 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43184 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43188 \begin_inset space ~
43192 \begin_inset space ~
43197 generates the output of the whole book, while
43201 will just output the chapter alone.
43204 \begin_layout Standard
43205 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43206 in the document settings (menu
43208 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43209 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43210 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43212 \begin_inset space ~
43216 \begin_inset space ~
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43228 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43232 ) or in the preferences (menu
43234 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43235 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43237 \begin_inset space ~
43240 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43242 \begin_inset space ~
43245 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43247 \begin_inset space ~
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43257 \begin_inset space ~
43261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43263 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43270 \begin_layout Subsection
43271 Update Master Document
43274 \begin_layout Standard
43275 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43291 \begin_inset space ~
43296 manual for more information on this topic).
43297 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43298 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43303 in the document settings (menu
43305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43307 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43309 \begin_inset space ~
43313 \begin_inset space ~
43319 \begin_inset space ~
43323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43325 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43329 ) or in the preferences (menu
43331 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43332 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43334 \begin_inset space ~
43337 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43339 \begin_inset space ~
43342 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43344 \begin_inset space ~
43348 \begin_inset space ~
43354 \begin_inset space ~
43358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43360 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43367 \begin_layout Subsection
43369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43371 name "subsec:Compressed"
43378 \begin_layout Standard
43379 Un/compresses the current document.
43380 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43381 compression (see the
43383 Additional Features
43385 manual for details).
43388 \begin_layout Subsection
43392 \begin_layout Standard
43393 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43396 \begin_layout Subsection
43400 \begin_layout Standard
43401 The document settings are described in appendix
43402 \begin_inset space ~
43406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43408 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43415 \begin_layout Section
43417 \begin_inset Index idx
43420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43429 \begin_layout Subsection
43433 \begin_layout Standard
43434 Spell checking is explained in section
43435 \begin_inset space ~
43439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43441 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43448 \begin_layout Subsection
43452 \begin_layout Standard
43453 The thesaurus is described in section
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43460 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43467 \begin_layout Subsection
43469 \begin_inset Index idx
43472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43479 \begin_inset Index idx
43482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43491 \begin_layout Standard
43492 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43493 the highlighted document part.
43496 \begin_layout Subsection
43502 \begin_inset Index idx
43505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43506 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43515 \begin_layout Standard
43516 Generates with the help of the program
43518 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43521 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43522 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43523 This feature is not available on Windows.
43526 \begin_layout Subsection
43532 \begin_inset Index idx
43535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43545 \begin_layout Standard
43546 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43551 \begin_inset space ~
43556 to see the full filename paths.
43559 \begin_layout Subsection
43561 \begin_inset Index idx
43564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43573 \begin_layout Standard
43574 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43575 files as described in section
43576 \begin_inset space ~
43580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43582 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43589 \begin_layout Subsection
43591 \begin_inset Index idx
43594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43607 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43625 \begin_inset Index idx
43628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43629 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43638 \begin_layout Standard
43639 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43640 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43641 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43642 -packages and programs it needs; see
43644 \begin_inset space ~
43648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43650 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43657 \begin_layout Subsection
43661 \begin_layout Standard
43666 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43667 \begin_inset space ~
43671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43673 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43680 \begin_layout Section
43682 \begin_inset Index idx
43685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43694 \begin_layout Standard
43695 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43696 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43698 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43702 \begin_layout Standard
43706 \begin_inset space ~
43711 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43712 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43713 packages and classes found
43714 by \SpecialChar LyX
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43722 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43729 \begin_layout Standard
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43738 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43743 \begin_layout Section
43745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43747 name "sec:Toolbars"
43754 \begin_layout Standard
43755 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43756 \begin_inset space ~
43760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43762 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43769 \begin_layout Standard
43770 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43771 This is described in the
43773 Additional Features
43778 \begin_layout Subsection
43780 \begin_inset Index idx
43783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43792 \begin_layout Standard
43793 \begin_inset Graphics
43794 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43802 \begin_layout Standard
43803 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43809 \begin_layout Standard
43810 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43827 \begin_inset Note Note
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43831 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43836 manual for more information.
43844 \begin_layout Standard
43845 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43851 \begin_layout Standard
43852 \begin_inset Tabular
43853 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43854 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43855 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43862 \begin_inset Graphics
43863 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43877 pull-down box for the environments
43890 \begin_layout Standard
43891 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43897 \begin_layout Standard
43899 \begin_inset Tabular
43900 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43901 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43902 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43903 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43927 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43957 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43987 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44003 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44017 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44024 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44033 arg "spelling-continuously"
44041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44045 Spellcheck continuously
44051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44104 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44134 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44141 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44164 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44194 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44196 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44201 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44219 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44233 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44259 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44273 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44301 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44315 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44316 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44344 Emphasize text, function of the
44345 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44348 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44353 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44355 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44361 arg "dialog-show character"
44372 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44393 Set text to noun style, function of the
44394 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44399 \begin_inset space ~
44402 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44404 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44410 arg "dialog-show character"
44421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44427 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44430 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44443 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44446 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44453 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44459 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44464 arg "textstyle-apply"
44474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44479 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44480 Format text using the current settings in the
44482 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44484 \begin_inset space ~
44487 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44522 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44524 \begin_inset space ~
44533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44542 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44570 arg "tabular-insert"
44578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44584 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44597 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44600 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44613 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44632 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44644 Toggle outline window on/off,
44646 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44662 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44674 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44689 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44701 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44714 \begin_layout Subsection
44716 \begin_inset Index idx
44719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44728 \begin_layout Standard
44729 \begin_inset Graphics
44730 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44738 \begin_layout Standard
44739 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44745 \begin_layout Standard
44746 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44750 \begin_layout Standard
44751 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44757 \begin_layout Standard
44758 \begin_inset Tabular
44759 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44760 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44761 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44762 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44799 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44817 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44826 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44853 arg "layout-toggle List"
44861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44880 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44907 arg "depth-increment"
44915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44921 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44923 \begin_inset space ~
44927 \begin_inset space ~
44936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44945 arg "depth-decrement"
44953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44961 \begin_inset space ~
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44983 arg "float-insert figure"
44991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44998 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45014 arg "float-insert table"
45022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45029 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45059 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45066 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45075 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45105 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45151 \begin_inset space ~
45160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45169 arg "nomencl-insert"
45177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45185 \begin_inset space ~
45194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45203 arg "footnote-insert"
45211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45217 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45233 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45249 \begin_inset space ~
45258 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45282 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45293 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45302 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45378 \begin_inset space ~
45387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45396 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45411 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45427 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45441 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45442 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45453 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45462 arg "dialog-show character"
45470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45476 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45478 \begin_inset space ~
45481 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45494 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45499 arg "textstyle-apply"
45507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45512 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45513 Format text using the recent settings in the
45516 arg "dialog-show character"
45525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45534 arg "layout-paragraph"
45542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45548 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45550 \begin_inset space ~
45559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45568 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45596 \begin_layout Subsection
45597 View/Update Toolbar
45598 \begin_inset Index idx
45601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45602 Toolbar ! View / Update
45610 \begin_layout Standard
45611 \begin_inset Graphics
45612 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45619 \begin_layout Standard
45620 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45626 \begin_layout Standard
45627 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45631 \begin_layout Standard
45632 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45638 \begin_layout Standard
45639 \begin_inset Tabular
45640 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45641 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45642 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45643 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45667 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 arg "buffer-update"
45691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45713 arg "master-buffer-view"
45721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45727 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45729 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
45731 \begin_inset space ~
45737 \begin_inset space ~
45746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45755 arg "master-buffer-update"
45763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45769 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45771 \begin_inset space ~
45775 \begin_inset space ~
45784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45793 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45808 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45810 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
45812 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
45815 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45816 Synchronize with Output
45822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45833 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45850 View (Other Formats)
45856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45863 arg "update-others"
45867 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45882 Update (Other Formats)
45895 \begin_layout Standard
45897 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45898 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45904 \begin_layout Subsection
45908 \begin_layout Standard
45909 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45910 \begin_inset space ~
45914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45916 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45920 , the table toolbar
45921 \begin_inset Index idx
45924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45933 \begin_inset space ~
45938 manual and the math macro toolbar
45939 \begin_inset Index idx
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 \begin_layout Chapter
45956 The Document Settings
45957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45959 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45964 \begin_inset Index idx
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45968 Document ! Settings
45976 \begin_layout Standard
45980 \begin_inset space ~
45985 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45986 is called with the menu
45988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45992 You can save your document settings as default with the
45994 Save as Document Defaults
45996 button in any dialog.
45997 This will create a template named
46001 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46002 when you create a new document without
46006 \begin_layout Standard
46011 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46012 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46015 \begin_layout Standard
46016 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46017 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46018 to find the one you are looking for.
46019 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46020 the submenus of the dialog.
46022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46026 \begin_inset space \space{}
46030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46037 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46038 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46039 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46042 \begin_layout Section
46046 \begin_layout Standard
46047 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46049 Document classes are described in section
46050 \begin_inset space ~
46054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46056 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46063 \begin_layout Standard
46067 \begin_inset space ~
46072 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46077 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46078 as a layout for a document class.
46079 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46081 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46090 \begin_layout Standard
46091 Some classes use special class options by default.
46092 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46096 and you can decide to use them or not.
46097 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46098 recommended you leave them untouched.
46103 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46104 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46109 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46111 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46117 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46118 \begin_inset Newline newline
46123 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46126 \begin_inset Newline newline
46129 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46130 distribution, see section
46135 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46137 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46150 \begin_layout Standard
46155 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46156 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46157 in the background if the child document
46158 is opened without its master.
46159 This way child documents are always compilable.
46160 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46167 \begin_inset space ~
46175 \begin_layout Standard
46176 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46187 \begin_inset Index idx
46190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46192 packages ! prettyref
46198 \begin_inset Index idx
46201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 packages ! refstyle
46208 for cross-references, see section
46209 \begin_inset space ~
46213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46215 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46222 \begin_layout Section
46226 \begin_layout Standard
46227 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46228 Please refer to the section
46231 \begin_inset space ~
46239 \begin_inset space ~
46244 manual for details.
46247 \begin_layout Section
46251 \begin_layout Standard
46252 Modules are explained in section
46253 \begin_inset space ~
46257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46259 reference "subsec:Modules"
46266 \begin_layout Section
46270 \begin_layout Standard
46272 \begin_inset space ~
46276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46278 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46285 \begin_layout Section
46289 \begin_layout Standard
46290 The document font settings are described in section
46291 \begin_inset space ~
46295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46297 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46304 \begin_layout Section
46308 \begin_layout Standard
46309 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46321 \begin_inset space ~
46326 and whether it should be a
46329 \begin_inset space ~
46334 can also be specified here.
46337 \begin_layout Standard
46338 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46339 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46340 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46342 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46345 \begin_layout Standard
46348 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46351 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46352 justifies the text on screen.
46353 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46355 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46359 \begin_layout Standard
46361 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46370 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46375 \begin_layout Section
46379 \begin_layout Standard
46380 This dialog is described in sections
46381 \begin_inset space ~
46385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46387 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46394 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46401 \begin_layout Section
46405 \begin_layout Standard
46406 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46407 \begin_inset space ~
46411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46413 reference "subsec:Margins"
46420 \begin_layout Section
46422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46424 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46429 \begin_inset Index idx
46432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46433 Language ! Encoding
46441 \begin_layout Standard
46442 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46443 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46444 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46446 is always encoded in utf8).
46447 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46448 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46449 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46450 -command is not known for
46451 a particular character).
46452 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46456 \begin_layout Standard
46458 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46459 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46460 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46461 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46462 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46463 's default encoding).
46464 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46465 's Unicode support covers the
46466 characters of most scripts.
46467 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46468 using one of the traditional, or
46469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46476 , encodings is necessary.
46479 \begin_layout Standard
46481 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46483 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46486 Traditional (auto-selected)
46492 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46493 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46494 the given language(s).
46496 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46500 \begin_layout Standard
46502 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46503 If you use the option
46508 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46511 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46512 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46515 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46518 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46519 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46520 exactly one encoding.
46521 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46526 \begin_layout Standard
46528 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46529 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46535 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46536 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46540 \begin_layout Standard
46542 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46543 Finally, you can also select
46547 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46548 Note that this encoding is then used for
46553 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46554 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46558 \begin_layout Standard
46560 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46563 Do not load inputenc
46565 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46566 from automatically loading the
46573 \begin_inset Index idx
46576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46578 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46580 packages ! inputenc
46588 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46589 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46590 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46591 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46592 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46594 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46600 Traditional (auto-selected)
46607 \begin_layout Standard
46609 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46611 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46612 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46613 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46614 installation supports Unicode), choose
46615 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46616 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46617 is quite incomplete, so
46618 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46623 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46624 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46625 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46626 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46627 -commands is not used, because all
46628 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46629 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46630 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46631 , two new alternative engines
46632 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46634 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46636 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46639 \begin_inset space ~
46647 \begin_inset space ~
46655 \begin_inset space ~
46661 \begin_inset space ~
46665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46667 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46672 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46676 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46681 \begin_layout Standard
46685 \begin_inset space ~
46690 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46691 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46701 The possible settings are:
46704 \begin_layout Description
46705 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46707 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46708 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46712 \begin_inset space ~
46716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46718 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46725 \begin_layout Description
46726 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46727 format you will use.
46728 In many cases this will be
46733 \begin_inset Index idx
46736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46744 If the newer package
46749 \begin_inset Index idx
46752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46754 packages ! polyglossia
46759 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46760 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46761 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46763 this package will be used instead of
46770 \begin_layout Description
46772 \begin_inset space ~
46783 would be more appropriate.
46786 \begin_layout Description
46787 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46788 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46792 (for German texts), type in
46795 \begin_inset Newline newline
46800 usepackage{ngerman}
46803 \begin_layout Description
46804 None will not use a language package.
46805 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46808 \begin_layout Standard
46809 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46812 \begin_layout Description
46814 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46816 \begin_inset space ~
46820 \begin_inset space ~
46824 \begin_inset space ~
46831 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46837 \begin_inset Index idx
46840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46842 packages ! inputenc
46848 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46849 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46850 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46856 \begin_layout Description
46857 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46859 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46860 commands, which may result in a big
46861 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46862 -commands are needed.
46864 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46865 This is the same as the
46878 \begin_layout Description
46880 \begin_inset space ~
46884 \begin_inset space ~
46887 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46890 \begin_layout Description
46892 \begin_inset space ~
46896 \begin_inset space ~
46899 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46902 \begin_layout Description
46904 \begin_inset space ~
46907 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46910 \begin_layout Description
46912 \begin_inset space ~
46916 \begin_inset space ~
46919 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46920 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46923 \begin_layout Description
46925 \begin_inset space ~
46929 \begin_inset space ~
46932 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46936 \begin_layout Description
46938 \begin_inset space ~
46942 \begin_inset space ~
46945 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46946 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46949 \begin_layout Description
46951 \begin_inset space ~
46955 \begin_inset space ~
46959 \begin_inset space ~
46962 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46963 \begin_inset space ~
46969 \begin_layout Description
46971 \begin_inset space ~
46975 \begin_inset space ~
46979 \begin_inset space ~
46982 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46983 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46986 \begin_layout Description
46988 \begin_inset space ~
46992 \begin_inset space ~
46995 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46996 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46997 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46998 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46999 \begin_inset space ~
47003 \begin_inset space ~
47009 \begin_layout Description
47011 \begin_inset space ~
47015 \begin_inset space ~
47018 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47019 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47020 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47022 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47023 \begin_inset space ~
47027 \begin_inset space ~
47033 \begin_layout Description
47035 \begin_inset space ~
47039 \begin_inset space ~
47042 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47045 \begin_layout Description
47047 \begin_inset space ~
47051 \begin_inset space ~
47054 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47057 \begin_layout Description
47059 \begin_inset space ~
47063 \begin_inset space ~
47066 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47069 \begin_layout Description
47071 \begin_inset space ~
47074 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47077 \begin_layout Description
47079 \begin_inset space ~
47082 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47085 \begin_layout Description
47087 \begin_inset space ~
47091 \begin_inset space ~
47094 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47097 \begin_layout Description
47099 \begin_inset space ~
47103 \begin_inset space ~
47109 \begin_layout Description
47111 \begin_inset space ~
47115 \begin_inset space ~
47118 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47121 \begin_layout Description
47123 \begin_inset space ~
47127 \begin_inset space ~
47133 \begin_layout Description
47135 \begin_inset space ~
47139 \begin_inset space ~
47142 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47148 \begin_inset Index idx
47151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47158 , when using this, set the document language to
47163 \begin_layout Description
47165 \begin_inset space ~
47169 \begin_inset space ~
47172 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47177 , when using this, set the document language to
47180 \begin_inset space ~
47186 \begin_layout Description
47188 \begin_inset space ~
47192 \begin_inset space ~
47195 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47201 \begin_inset Index idx
47204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47206 packages ! japanese
47211 , when using this, set the document language to
47216 \begin_layout Description
47218 \begin_inset space ~
47222 \begin_inset space ~
47225 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47230 , when using this, set the document language to
47235 \begin_layout Description
47237 \begin_inset space ~
47241 \begin_inset space ~
47244 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47249 , when using this, set the document language to
47254 \begin_layout Description
47256 \begin_inset space ~
47259 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47262 \begin_layout Description
47264 \begin_inset space ~
47268 \begin_inset space ~
47272 \begin_inset space ~
47275 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47278 \begin_layout Description
47280 \begin_inset space ~
47284 \begin_inset space ~
47288 \begin_inset space ~
47291 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47292 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47293 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47296 \begin_layout Description
47298 \begin_inset space ~
47302 \begin_inset space ~
47308 \begin_layout Description
47310 \begin_inset space ~
47314 \begin_inset space ~
47317 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47318 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47321 \begin_layout Description
47323 \begin_inset space ~
47327 \begin_inset space ~
47330 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47336 \begin_inset Index idx
47339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47346 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47347 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47349 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47350 with the default encoding (
47352 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47358 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47359 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47364 \begin_layout Description
47366 \begin_inset space ~
47374 \begin_inset space ~
47377 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47384 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47387 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47394 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47395 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47397 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47400 \begin_layout Description
47402 \begin_inset space ~
47406 \begin_inset space ~
47409 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47415 \begin_inset Index idx
47418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47426 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47429 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47431 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47432 This used to be more comprehensive than
47435 \begin_inset space ~
47440 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47445 \begin_layout Description
47447 \begin_inset space ~
47450 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47456 \begin_inset Index idx
47459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47461 packages ! inputenc
47468 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47469 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47471 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47472 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47473 with the default encoding (
47475 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47481 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47482 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47487 \begin_layout Description
47489 \begin_inset space ~
47493 \begin_inset space ~
47497 \begin_inset space ~
47500 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47501 \begin_inset space ~
47507 \begin_layout Description
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47513 \begin_inset space ~
47517 \begin_inset space ~
47520 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47521 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47522 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47526 \begin_layout Description
47528 \begin_inset space ~
47532 \begin_inset space ~
47536 \begin_inset space ~
47539 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47540 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47543 \begin_layout Section
47545 \begin_inset Index idx
47548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47555 \begin_inset Index idx
47558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47565 \begin_inset Index idx
47568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47569 Color ! Shaded boxes
47575 \begin_inset Index idx
47578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47579 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47587 \begin_layout Standard
47588 Here you can alter the font color for the
47592 (default: black), for
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47600 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47604 (default: white) and for
47607 \begin_inset space ~
47617 sets the color back to the default.
47620 \begin_layout Standard
47621 Clicking any button showing
47629 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47630 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47631 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47632 later more quickly.
47635 \begin_layout Standard
47636 Note, if you change the
47639 \begin_inset space ~
47644 font color and use the option
47647 \begin_inset space ~
47652 in the document settings under
47655 \begin_inset space ~
47660 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47661 \begin_inset space ~
47665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47667 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47674 \begin_layout Standard
47675 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47681 \begin_layout Standard
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47694 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47697 \begin_inset space ~
47700 Code after a forced page break:
47703 \begin_layout Itemize
47704 For the page color:
47705 \begin_inset Newline newline
47712 pagecolor{color name}
47715 \begin_layout Itemize
47716 For the text color:
47717 \begin_inset Newline newline
47727 \begin_layout Standard
47728 You are restricted to one of
47764 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47771 \begin_inset space ~
47777 \begin_inset Newline newline
47780 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47781 names to refer to them:
47784 \begin_layout Itemize
47790 \begin_inset Newline newline
47795 page_backgroundcolor
47798 \begin_layout Itemize
47802 \begin_inset space ~
47808 \begin_inset Newline newline
47816 \begin_layout Itemize
47820 \begin_inset space ~
47826 \begin_inset Newline newline
47834 \begin_layout Itemize
47838 \begin_inset space ~
47844 \begin_inset Newline newline
47852 \begin_layout Standard
47853 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47856 \begin_inset space ~
47864 \begin_inset space ~
47872 \begin_layout Section
47874 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47878 \begin_layout Standard
47880 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47881 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47882 \begin_inset space ~
47886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47888 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47896 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47897 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47900 \begin_layout Standard
47902 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47903 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47905 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47908 \begin_layout Section
47912 \begin_layout Standard
47913 Here you can adjust the
47917 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47921 as described in section
47922 \begin_inset space ~
47926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47928 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47933 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47937 \begin_layout Standard
47939 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47940 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47942 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47943 of this package can be used as well.
47944 The most common one are:
47947 \begin_layout Description
47949 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47950 right Line numbers to the right margin
47953 \begin_layout Description
47955 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47956 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47960 \begin_layout Description
47962 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47963 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47966 \begin_layout Description
47968 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47969 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47972 \begin_layout Description
47974 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47976 \begin_inset space ~
47979 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47984 \begin_layout Section
47988 \begin_layout Standard
47989 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47995 \begin_inset Index idx
47998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48000 packages ! biblatex
48010 \begin_inset Index idx
48013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48025 \begin_inset Index idx
48028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48036 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48039 Sectioned bibliography
48041 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48047 \begin_inset Index idx
48050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48052 packages ! bibtopic
48062 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48063 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48067 for the generation of the bibliography.
48068 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48069 \begin_inset space ~
48073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48075 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48082 \begin_layout Section
48086 \begin_layout Standard
48087 Here you can define the
48091 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48093 \begin_inset space ~
48097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48099 reference "sec:Index"
48106 \begin_layout Section
48110 \begin_layout Standard
48111 The PDF properties are explained in section
48112 \begin_inset space ~
48116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48118 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48125 \begin_layout Section
48129 \begin_layout Standard
48130 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48131 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48137 \begin_inset Index idx
48140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48152 \begin_inset Index idx
48155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48167 \begin_inset Index idx
48170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48182 \begin_inset Index idx
48185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48197 \begin_inset Index idx
48200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48202 packages ! mathdots
48212 \begin_inset Index idx
48215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48217 packages ! mathtools
48227 \begin_inset Index idx
48230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48242 \begin_inset Index idx
48245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48247 packages ! stackrel
48257 \begin_inset Index idx
48260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48262 packages ! stmaryrd
48272 \begin_inset Index idx
48275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48277 packages ! undertilde
48282 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48285 \begin_layout Description
48286 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48287 -errors in formulas,
48288 ensure that you have this enabled.
48291 \begin_layout Description
48292 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48293 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48294 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48298 \begin_layout Description
48299 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48302 \begin_inset space ~
48314 \begin_layout Description
48315 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48318 \begin_inset space ~
48330 \begin_layout Description
48331 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48342 \begin_layout Description
48343 mathtools is used for the math commands
48379 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48386 \begin_layout Description
48387 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48389 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48398 \begin_layout Description
48399 stackrel is used for the math command
48416 \begin_layout Description
48417 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48420 \begin_layout Description
48421 undertilde is used for the math command
48429 Accents for one Character
48438 \begin_layout Section
48440 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48442 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48448 \begin_layout Standard
48450 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48451 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48454 \begin_layout Standard
48456 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48457 The float placement options
48458 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48461 are described in the section
48464 \begin_inset space ~
48468 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48470 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48478 \begin_inset space ~
48486 \begin_layout Section
48490 \begin_layout Standard
48491 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48493 Program Code Listings
48498 \begin_inset space ~
48506 \begin_layout Section
48510 \begin_layout Standard
48511 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48519 set to be used and set the
48524 The itemize environment is described in section
48525 \begin_inset space ~
48529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48531 reference "sec:Itemize"
48538 \begin_layout Standard
48539 You can furthermore specify a
48542 \begin_inset space ~
48547 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48548 command of the desired character.
48549 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48556 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48562 \begin_inset space \space{}
48566 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48576 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48577 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48580 \begin_layout Standard
48581 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48589 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48590 -packages in the preamble (menu
48593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48594 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48597 \begin_inset space ~
48603 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48607 usepackage{textcomp}
48610 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48614 usepackage{amssymb}
48624 \begin_layout Section
48628 \begin_layout Standard
48629 Branches are described in section
48630 \begin_inset space ~
48634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48636 reference "sec:Branches"
48643 \begin_layout Section
48645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48647 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48654 \begin_layout Standard
48655 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48658 \begin_layout Description
48660 \begin_inset space ~
48664 \begin_inset space ~
48667 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48687 View Master Document
48688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48695 Update Master Document
48696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48703 menu or the toolbar.
48704 The default is set in
48706 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48707 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48709 \begin_inset space ~
48712 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48716 \begin_inset space ~
48720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48722 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48729 \begin_layout Description
48731 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48733 \begin_inset space ~
48737 \begin_inset space ~
48741 \begin_inset space ~
48744 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48749 option which is needed with some packages.
48750 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48751 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48754 \begin_layout Description
48756 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48758 \begin_inset space ~
48762 \begin_inset space ~
48765 Options offers settings for the
48773 \begin_layout Itemize
48777 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48779 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48781 \begin_inset space ~
48787 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48789 \begin_inset space ~
48793 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48799 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48801 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48802 settings for the menu
48804 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48808 \begin_inset space ~
48812 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48815 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48816 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48821 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48823 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48825 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48828 or a detailed description see section
48830 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48835 \begin_inset space ~
48841 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48845 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48849 \begin_layout Itemize
48851 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48854 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48856 determines whether so-called
48857 \begin_inset Quotes els
48861 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48865 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48867 \begin_inset Quotes els
48871 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48874 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48875 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48876 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48878 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48880 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48881 macros, you can uncheck this.
48882 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48889 \begin_layout Description
48891 \begin_inset space ~
48895 \begin_inset space ~
48898 Options offers settings for the export format
48906 \begin_inset space ~
48911 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48912 \begin_inset space ~
48915 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48919 \begin_inset space ~
48924 settings are described in detail in section
48926 Math Output in XHTML
48931 \begin_inset space ~
48940 \begin_inset space ~
48944 \begin_inset space ~
48949 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48952 \begin_layout Description
48954 \begin_inset space ~
48959 Save transient properties
48961 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48962 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48963 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48967 \begin_layout Itemize
48968 the activation of change tracking
48971 \begin_layout Itemize
48972 the output of tracked changes
48975 \begin_layout Itemize
48976 the recording of the document directory path.
48979 \begin_layout Standard
48980 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48981 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48985 \begin_layout Section
48993 \begin_layout Standard
48994 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48996 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48998 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49000 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49004 \begin_layout Standard
49005 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49006 -syntax is given in section
49007 \begin_inset space ~
49011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49013 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49020 \begin_layout Chapter
49026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49028 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49033 \begin_inset Index idx
49036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49045 \begin_layout Standard
49046 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49048 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49052 It has the following submenus.
49055 \begin_layout Section
49059 \begin_layout Subsection
49063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49064 User Interface File
49065 \begin_inset Index idx
49068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49069 Customization ! of toolbars
49075 \begin_inset Index idx
49078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49079 Customization ! of menus
49087 \begin_layout Standard
49088 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49089 interface (ui) file.
49090 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49098 \begin_layout Description
49103 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49106 \begin_layout Description
49113 the menu entries in popup context menus
49116 \begin_layout Description
49121 specifies the toolbar buttons
49124 \begin_layout Standard
49125 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49126 and edit the entries.
49129 \begin_layout Standard
49130 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49142 entries must be finished with an explicit
49167 and in the case of the
49168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49180 The syntax for the entries is:
49183 \begin_layout Standard
49184 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49213 \begin_layout Standard
49215 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49218 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49219 -functions are listed in the menu
49221 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49223 \begin_inset space ~
49231 \begin_layout Standard
49232 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49238 \begin_layout Standard
49239 For example, assuming you use the menu
49241 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49244 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49248 \begin_layout Standard
49249 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49273 \begin_layout Standard
49275 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49290 to have the sixth bookmark.
49293 \begin_layout Standard
49297 \begin_inset space ~
49302 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49303 's toolbar buttons.
49304 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49308 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49316 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49320 \begin_layout Standard
49323 Enable tool tips in main work area
49325 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49333 \begin_layout Standard
49338 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49339 should display in the menu
49341 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49343 \begin_inset space ~
49351 \begin_layout Subsection
49355 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49359 \begin_layout Standard
49362 Restore window layouts and geometries
49365 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49366 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49370 \begin_layout Standard
49373 Restore cursor positions
49375 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49379 \begin_layout Standard
49382 Load opened files from last session
49384 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49388 \begin_layout Standard
49391 Clear all session information
49393 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49394 sessions (cursor positions, names
49395 of last opened documents, etc.).
49398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49402 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49407 \begin_inset Index idx
49410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49419 \begin_layout Standard
49422 Backup original documents when saving
49424 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49425 it was saved the last time.
49426 It is stored in the
49429 \begin_inset space ~
49435 \begin_inset space ~
49439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49441 reference "sec:Paths"
49445 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49448 \begin_inset space ~
49454 The backup file has the file extension
49455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49469 \begin_layout Standard
49472 Backup documents, every
49474 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49477 \begin_layout Standard
49480 Save documents compressed by default
49482 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49483 \begin_inset space ~
49487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49489 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49494 This applies to newly created documents only.
49495 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49498 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49499 Windows & work area
49502 \begin_layout Standard
49505 Open documents in tabs
49507 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49511 \begin_layout Standard
49516 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49523 \begin_inset space ~
49527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49529 reference "sec:Paths"
49533 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49540 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49541 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49542 of \SpecialChar LyX
49544 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49545 instance is created for each file.
49548 \begin_layout Standard
49551 Single close-tab button
49553 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49563 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49564 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49565 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49569 \begin_layout Standard
49570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49578 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49579 before the change takes effect.
49587 \begin_layout Standard
49592 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49594 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49596 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49600 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49601 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49602 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49605 \begin_layout Subsection
49607 \begin_inset Index idx
49610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49619 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49626 \begin_layout Standard
49627 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49631 \begin_layout Standard
49632 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49640 This section only deals with the fonts
49644 the \SpecialChar LyX
49646 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49649 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49650 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49661 \begin_layout Standard
49662 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49679 (depends on the system) as its
49682 \begin_inset space ~
49698 \begin_layout Standard
49699 You can change the font size with the
49706 \begin_layout Standard
49711 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49716 points have the size of 1
49717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49721 \begin_inset space ~
49725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49727 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49732 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49737 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49738 \begin_inset space ~
49742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49744 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49751 \begin_layout Subsection
49753 \begin_inset Index idx
49756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49757 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49764 \begin_inset Index idx
49767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49776 \begin_layout Standard
49777 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49778 by choosing an item in the
49779 list and selecting the
49786 \begin_layout Standard
49787 By checking the option
49791 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49794 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49795 \begin_inset space ~
49799 \begin_inset space ~
49804 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49807 \begin_layout Subsection
49809 \begin_inset Index idx
49812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49821 \begin_layout Standard
49822 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49826 \begin_layout Standard
49831 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49832 This feature is described in section
49833 \begin_inset space ~
49837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49839 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49846 \begin_layout Standard
49847 Checking the option
49850 \begin_inset space ~
49854 \begin_inset space ~
49858 \begin_inset space ~
49863 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49866 \begin_layout Section
49868 \begin_inset Index idx
49871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49880 \begin_layout Subsection
49884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49888 \begin_layout Standard
49891 Cursor follows scrollbar
49893 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49897 \begin_layout Standard
49898 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49899 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49900 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49903 \begin_layout Standard
49906 Scroll below end of document
49908 is self-explanatory.
49911 \begin_layout Standard
49912 In \SpecialChar LyX
49913 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49920 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49922 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49923 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49924 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49928 \begin_layout Standard
49930 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49933 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49935 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49936 paste operations (i.
49937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49940 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49941 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49942 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49943 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49944 dissolving from insets.
49949 \begin_layout Standard
49952 Sort environments alphabetically
49954 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49957 \begin_layout Standard
49960 Group environments by their category
49962 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49965 \begin_layout Standard
49970 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49979 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
49983 \begin_layout Standard
49985 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
49988 Search drive for cited files
49990 allows \SpecialChar LyX
49991 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
49994 \begin_inset space ~
49998 \begin_inset space ~
50002 \begin_inset space ~
50006 \begin_inset space ~
50009 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50012 context menu on a citation.
50017 field determines the search pattern.
50019 \begin_inset space ~
50023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50025 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50038 \begin_layout Standard
50039 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50044 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50045 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50049 \begin_layout Subsection
50051 \begin_inset Index idx
50054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50061 \begin_inset Index idx
50064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50065 Settings ! Shortcuts
50073 \begin_layout Standard
50078 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50080 Several binding files are available, among them:
50083 \begin_layout Description
50084 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50087 \begin_layout Description
50088 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50100 \begin_layout Description
50101 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50112 \begin_layout Standard
50113 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50118 , and binding files for special languages.
50119 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50124 \begin_inset space \space{}
50128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50136 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50137 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50138 will try to use the appropriate binding
50142 \begin_layout Standard
50143 Some binding files, like
50147 , only have a limited scope.
50148 When looking at the end of the file
50152 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50155 \begin_layout Standard
50159 \begin_inset space ~
50163 \begin_inset space ~
50168 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50169 in the selected key binding file.
50172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50176 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50181 \begin_inset Index idx
50184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50185 Key Bindings ! Editing
50193 \begin_layout Standard
50194 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50195 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50196 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50197 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50200 Show key-bindings containing
50203 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50204 Insert there for example as keyword
50205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50212 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50213 functions that contain
50214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50222 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50223 All \SpecialChar LyX
50224 functions are also listed in the file
50229 that you will find in the
50236 \begin_layout Standard
50237 For example, to add the shortcut
50245 , select the function and press the
50250 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50251 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50254 \begin_layout Standard
50255 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50256 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50261 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
50263 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
50268 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
50271 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50275 \begin_layout Standard
50276 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50279 \begin_layout Standard
50280 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50282 The syntax of the entries is:
50285 \begin_layout Standard
50291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50310 \begin_layout Standard
50311 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50312 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50340 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50341 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50342 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50343 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50345 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50349 , you needed to specify it as
50354 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50357 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50360 \begin_layout Subsection
50362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50364 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50369 \begin_inset Index idx
50372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50379 \begin_inset Index idx
50382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50383 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50391 \begin_layout Standard
50392 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50393 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50394 provides keyboard maps.
50395 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50396 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50399 \begin_inset space ~
50403 \begin_inset space ~
50408 and select the keyboard map file named
50415 \begin_layout Standard
50424 keyboard map and, if you use the
50428 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50431 arg "keymap-primary"
50437 arg "keymap-secondary"
50440 respectively or toggle between them with
50443 arg "keymap-toggle"
50449 \begin_layout Standard
50450 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50458 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50467 \begin_layout Standard
50468 You can also specify the mouse
50470 Wheel scrolling speed
50473 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50477 Middle mouse button pasting
50479 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50480 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50483 \begin_layout Standard
50491 \begin_inset space ~
50495 \begin_inset space ~
50500 you can select a key for zooming.
50501 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50504 \begin_layout Subsection
50508 \begin_layout Standard
50509 Input completion is described in section
50510 \begin_inset space ~
50514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50516 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50523 \begin_layout Section
50525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50532 \begin_inset Index idx
50535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50542 \begin_inset Index idx
50545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50554 \begin_layout Standard
50555 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50556 are normally determined during
50558 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50561 \begin_layout Description
50563 \begin_inset space ~
50566 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50567 's working directory.
50568 It is the default when you
50579 \begin_inset space ~
50587 \begin_layout Description
50589 \begin_inset space ~
50592 templates This directory
50593 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50594 contains the templates that are shown
50595 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50596 will be opened when you use the menu
50597 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50602 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50604 \begin_inset space ~
50608 \begin_inset space ~
50616 \begin_layout Description
50618 \begin_inset space ~
50621 files This directory
50622 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50623 will be opened when you use the
50624 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50625 contains the example files that are listed in
50628 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50637 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50639 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50641 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50647 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50649 \begin_inset Newline newline
50653 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50665 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50666 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50676 \begin_layout Description
50678 \begin_inset space ~
50682 \begin_inset Index idx
50685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50691 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50692 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50693 \begin_inset space ~
50697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50699 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50707 will be used to save the backups.
50708 \begin_inset Newline newline
50711 Backup files have the ending
50712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50722 \begin_layout Description
50724 \begin_inset space ~
50727 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50728 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50730 \begin_inset Newline newline
50737 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50743 You can edit this file with the program
50752 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50753 in its preferences under
50756 \begin_inset space ~
50762 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50767 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50769 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50770 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50776 and \SpecialChar LyX
50777 need to be running the same time.
50778 \begin_inset Newline newline
50781 The pipe is also used for the
50785 feature, see section
50786 \begin_inset space ~
50790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50792 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50797 \begin_inset Newline newline
50800 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50801 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50802 \begin_inset Newline newline
50818 \begin_layout Description
50820 \begin_inset space ~
50823 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50826 \begin_layout Description
50828 \begin_inset space ~
50831 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50832 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50833 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50836 \begin_layout Description
50838 \begin_inset space ~
50841 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50847 You only need to specify it if you are using
50851 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50853 For \SpecialChar LyX
50858 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50862 \begin_layout Description
50864 \begin_inset space ~
50867 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50868 When \SpecialChar LyX
50869 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50870 to find it on the system.
50871 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50873 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50882 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50883 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50886 \begin_layout Description
50888 \begin_inset space ~
50891 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50892 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50893 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50894 code or in the document
50896 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50898 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50899 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50900 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50901 scanned for the input files.
50902 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50903 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50905 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50906 compilation may fail for some documents.
50909 \begin_layout Section
50913 \begin_layout Standard
50914 Here you can insert your
50923 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50925 \begin_inset space ~
50929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50931 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50935 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50938 \begin_layout Section
50940 \begin_inset Index idx
50943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50944 Language ! Settings
50950 \begin_inset Index idx
50953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50954 Settings ! Language
50962 \begin_layout Subsection
50964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50966 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50973 \begin_layout Description
50975 \begin_inset space ~
50979 \begin_inset space ~
50982 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50984 You can find its actual translation status here:
50985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50987 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50993 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50999 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51000 LaTeX Language Support
51005 \begin_layout Description
51007 \begin_inset space ~
51010 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51011 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51012 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51013 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51030 The most widespread language package is
51035 \begin_inset Index idx
51038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51045 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51047 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51048 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51049 come with the alternative
51055 \begin_inset Index idx
51058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51060 packages ! polyglossia
51065 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51066 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51072 The available selections are described in section
51073 \begin_inset space ~
51077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51079 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51086 \begin_layout Description
51088 \begin_inset space ~
51092 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51093 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51094 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51096 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51100 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51104 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51106 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51110 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51111 that is used to switch to a different language
51112 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51113 to start the package
51117 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51118 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51122 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51123 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51126 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51130 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51138 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51146 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51149 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51151 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51155 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51173 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51174 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51181 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51182 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51187 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51192 , this setting is ignored.
51197 \begin_layout Description
51199 \begin_inset space ~
51203 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51210 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51211 Use this if the language switch set in
51215 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51219 's alternative command
51223 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51224 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51227 end{otherlanguage*}
51231 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51232 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51233 command toggles the package on and off
51234 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51235 Empty by default, as
51239 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51241 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51246 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51252 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51257 , this setting is ignored.
51262 \begin_layout Description
51264 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51266 \begin_inset space ~
51270 \begin_inset space ~
51273 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51277 \begin_layout Description
51279 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51281 \begin_inset space ~
51285 \begin_inset space ~
51288 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51294 \begin_layout Description
51296 \begin_inset space ~
51300 \begin_inset space ~
51304 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51306 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51309 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51310 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51313 to the document class options
51314 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51315 rather than the language package options.
51316 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51320 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51321 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51323 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51324 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51326 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51331 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51332 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51341 \begin_layout Description
51343 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51345 \begin_inset space ~
51349 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51351 \begin_inset space ~
51355 \begin_inset space ~
51359 \begin_inset space ~
51365 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51367 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51370 this option is set,
51371 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51372 the language switch defined in
51375 \begin_inset space ~
51380 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51381 to the document language.
51382 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51383 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51386 \begin_inset space ~
51391 or if a package resets the document language.
51392 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51393 usually should be the document language).
51394 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51395 documents start with the chosen document language.
51396 When this option is not set, the
51399 \begin_inset space ~
51404 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51406 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51409 \begin_inset space ~
51419 \begin_layout Description
51421 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51423 \begin_inset space ~
51427 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51429 \begin_inset space ~
51433 \begin_inset space ~
51437 \begin_inset space ~
51443 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51447 \begin_inset space ~
51451 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51452 Set document language explicitly
51458 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51460 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51466 \begin_inset space ~
51472 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51474 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51478 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51480 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51483 the end of the document.
51484 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51489 \paragraph_spacing single
51491 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51497 \begin_layout Description
51499 \begin_inset space ~
51503 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51505 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51509 \begin_inset space ~
51513 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51515 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51517 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51521 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51524 in a language different
51525 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51527 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51530 the document language will be
51531 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51532 marked (by default with a blue
51535 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51537 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51541 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51545 \begin_layout Description
51547 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51549 \begin_inset space ~
51553 \begin_inset space ~
51557 \begin_inset space ~
51560 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51561 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51562 switched via the operating system.
51563 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51568 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51569 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51574 \begin_layout Description
51576 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51578 \begin_inset space ~
51582 \begin_inset space ~
51585 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51586 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51591 \begin_layout Description
51593 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51595 \begin_inset space ~
51599 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51601 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51605 \begin_inset space ~
51609 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51610 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51611 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51613 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51617 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51619 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51620 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51622 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51623 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51624 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51626 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51631 \begin_layout Standard
51636 means that the cursor
51637 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51638 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51639 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51644 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51645 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51649 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51651 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51652 specific case always means: move
51656 in text (even if this means:
51662 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51663 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51664 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51665 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51666 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51678 \begin_layout Standard
51680 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51685 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51686 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51687 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51691 ) when coming from the left.
51692 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51694 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51695 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51696 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51701 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51703 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51707 \begin_layout Description
51709 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51711 \begin_inset space ~
51715 \begin_inset space ~
51718 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51719 separator alignment).
51720 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51725 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51726 (static) custom character here.
51729 \begin_layout Description
51731 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51733 \begin_inset space ~
51737 \begin_inset space ~
51740 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51746 \begin_layout Subsection
51750 \begin_layout Standard
51751 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51752 \begin_inset space ~
51756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51758 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51765 \begin_layout Section
51769 \begin_layout Subsection
51771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51773 name "subsec:General-output"
51780 \begin_layout Description
51782 \begin_inset space ~
51785 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51787 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51789 \begin_inset space ~
51795 For a detailed description see section
51797 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51802 \begin_inset space ~
51810 \begin_layout Description
51812 \begin_inset space ~
51815 Options Options for the program
51819 that is used for the export format
51824 \begin_inset space ~
51828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51830 reference "subsec:Export"
51835 Possible options are listed in the
51840 \begin_inset Newline newline
51844 \begin_inset Flex URL
51847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51849 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51859 \begin_layout Description
51861 \begin_inset space ~
51865 \begin_inset space ~
51868 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51871 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51872 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51874 \begin_inset space ~
51880 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51883 \begin_layout Description
51885 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51887 \begin_inset space ~
51891 \begin_inset Index idx
51894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51901 \begin_inset Index idx
51904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51905 Settings ! Date format
51910 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51911 \begin_inset Newline newline
51915 \begin_inset Flex URL
51918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51920 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51926 \begin_inset Newline newline
51929 For example the format
51930 \begin_inset Newline newline
51934 \begin_inset Newline newline
51937 prints the date as day/month/year.
51942 \begin_layout Description
51944 \begin_inset space ~
51948 \begin_inset space ~
51951 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51952 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51955 \begin_layout Subsection
51961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51963 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51968 \begin_inset Index idx
51971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51972 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51981 \begin_layout Description
51983 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51985 \begin_inset space ~
51993 \begin_inset space ~
51997 \begin_inset space ~
52000 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52005 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52026 are used for Cyrillic.
52027 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52040 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52042 sets up in the background.
52043 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52048 \begin_layout Description
52050 \begin_inset space ~
52054 \begin_inset space ~
52058 \begin_inset space ~
52062 \begin_inset space ~
52065 options They only have an effect when the program
52069 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52072 \begin_layout Standard
52073 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52074 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52075 manuals of the applications.
52078 \begin_layout Description
52080 \begin_inset space ~
52083 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52084 \begin_inset space ~
52088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52090 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52097 \begin_layout Description
52099 \begin_inset space ~
52102 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52103 \begin_inset space ~
52107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52109 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52116 \begin_layout Description
52118 \begin_inset space ~
52121 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52122 \begin_inset space ~
52126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52128 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52135 \begin_layout Description
52141 \begin_inset space ~
52144 command Command for the program
52146 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52149 that is described in the section
52151 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52156 Additional Features
52161 \begin_layout Standard
52162 There are additionally the following options:
52165 \begin_layout Description
52167 \begin_inset space ~
52171 \begin_inset space ~
52175 \begin_inset space ~
52179 \begin_inset space ~
52184 \begin_inset space ~
52187 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52205 to separate folders.
52206 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52208 \begin_inset Index idx
52211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52218 \begin_inset Index idx
52221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52230 \begin_layout Description
52232 \begin_inset space ~
52236 \begin_inset space ~
52240 \begin_inset space ~
52244 \begin_inset space ~
52248 \begin_inset space ~
52252 \begin_inset space ~
52255 changes Removes all manually set
52261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52262 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52264 \begin_inset space ~
52269 dialog when changing the document class.
52272 \begin_layout Section
52274 \begin_inset space ~
52278 \begin_inset Index idx
52281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52290 \begin_layout Subsection
52292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52294 name "subsec:Converters"
52299 \begin_inset Index idx
52302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52311 \begin_layout Standard
52312 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52313 from one format to another.
52314 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52315 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52322 \begin_inset space ~
52327 field and press the
52332 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52336 \begin_inset space ~
52341 drop-down list, modify the
52345 field and press the
52352 \begin_layout Standard
52355 Converter File Cache
52361 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52363 Maximum Age (in days
52366 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52367 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52370 \begin_layout Standard
52371 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52372 definition, is described in the section
52383 \begin_layout Subsection
52385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52387 name "sec:File-Formats"
52392 \begin_inset Index idx
52395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52402 \begin_inset Index idx
52405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52414 \begin_layout Standard
52415 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52425 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52428 \begin_layout Standard
52429 You can also define the
52431 Default output format
52433 that is used when you use
52435 View, Update, View Master Document
52439 Update Master Document
52445 menu or the toolbar.
52448 \begin_layout Standard
52449 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52460 \begin_layout Standard
52461 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52463 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52464 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52465 This is done by specifying a
52470 More about this is described in the section
52481 \begin_layout Chapter
52482 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52484 \begin_inset Index idx
52487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52496 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52503 \begin_layout Standard
52505 \begin_inset space ~
52509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52511 reference "tab:Units"
52515 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52516 and used in this documentation.
52519 \begin_layout Standard
52520 \begin_inset Float table
52527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52528 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52546 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52554 \begin_inset Tabular
52555 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52556 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52558 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52712 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52983 scaled point (65536
52984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53051 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53175 % of original image width
53180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53264 \begin_layout Standard
53265 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53268 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53275 \begin_layout Bibliography
53276 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53277 LatexCommand bibitem
53284 The \SpecialChar LyX
53286 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53289 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53295 \begin_inset Newline newline
53299 \begin_inset Flex URL
53302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53304 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53312 \begin_layout Bibliography
53313 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53314 LatexCommand bibitem
53315 key "latexcompanion"
53320 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53322 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53323 Companion Second Edition.
53326 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53329 \begin_layout Bibliography
53330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53331 LatexCommand bibitem
53337 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53340 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53344 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53347 \begin_layout Bibliography
53348 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53349 LatexCommand bibitem
53358 : A Document Preparation System.
53361 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53364 \begin_layout Bibliography
53365 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53366 LatexCommand bibitem
53376 The \SpecialChar TeX
53380 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53383 \begin_layout Bibliography
53384 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53385 LatexCommand bibitem
53391 The \SpecialChar TeX
53393 \begin_inset Newline newline
53397 \begin_inset Flex URL
53400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53402 https://ctan.org/topic
53410 \begin_layout Bibliography
53411 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53412 LatexCommand bibitem
53418 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53420 \begin_inset Newline newline
53424 \begin_inset Flex URL
53427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53429 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53437 \begin_layout Bibliography
53438 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53439 LatexCommand bibitem
53446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53448 name "Documentation"
53449 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53456 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53460 \begin_inset Newline newline
53464 \begin_inset Flex URL
53467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53469 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53477 \begin_layout Bibliography
53478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53479 LatexCommand bibitem
53486 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53488 name "Documentation"
53489 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53494 how to use the program
53496 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53500 \begin_inset Newline newline
53504 \begin_inset Flex URL
53507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53509 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53517 \begin_layout Bibliography
53518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53519 LatexCommand bibitem
53526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53528 name "Documentation"
53529 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53534 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53540 \begin_inset Index idx
53543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53545 packages ! biblatex
53551 \begin_inset Newline newline
53555 \begin_inset Flex URL
53558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53560 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53568 \begin_layout Bibliography
53569 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53570 LatexCommand bibitem
53577 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53579 name "Documentation"
53580 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53585 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53591 \begin_inset Index idx
53594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53602 \begin_inset Newline newline
53606 \begin_inset Flex URL
53609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53611 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53619 \begin_layout Bibliography
53620 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53621 LatexCommand bibitem
53628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53630 name "Documentation"
53631 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53641 \begin_inset Newline newline
53645 \begin_inset Flex URL
53648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53650 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53658 \begin_layout Bibliography
53659 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53660 LatexCommand bibitem
53661 key "makeindex-man"
53667 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53670 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53680 \begin_inset Newline newline
53684 \begin_inset Flex URL
53687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53689 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53697 \begin_layout Bibliography
53698 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53699 LatexCommand bibitem
53706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53708 name "Documentation"
53709 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53719 \begin_inset Newline newline
53723 \begin_inset Flex URL
53726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53728 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53736 \begin_layout Bibliography
53737 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53738 LatexCommand bibitem
53745 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53747 name "Documentation"
53748 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53753 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53755 \begin_inset Newline newline
53759 \begin_inset Flex URL
53762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53764 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53772 \begin_layout Bibliography
53773 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53774 LatexCommand bibitem
53781 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53783 name "Documentation"
53784 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53789 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53795 \begin_inset Index idx
53798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53806 \begin_inset Newline newline
53810 \begin_inset Flex URL
53813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53815 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53823 \begin_layout Bibliography
53824 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53825 LatexCommand bibitem
53832 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53834 name "Documentation"
53835 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53840 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53846 \begin_inset Index idx
53849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53851 packages ! enumitem
53857 \begin_inset Newline newline
53861 \begin_inset Flex URL
53864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53866 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53874 \begin_layout Bibliography
53875 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53876 LatexCommand bibitem
53883 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53885 name "Documentation"
53886 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53891 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53897 \begin_inset Index idx
53900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53902 packages ! fancyhdr
53908 \begin_inset Newline newline
53912 \begin_inset Flex URL
53915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53917 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53925 \begin_layout Bibliography
53926 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53927 LatexCommand bibitem
53934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53936 name "Documentation"
53937 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53942 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53948 \begin_inset Index idx
53951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53953 packages ! hyperref
53959 \begin_inset Newline newline
53963 \begin_inset Flex URL
53966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53968 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53976 \begin_layout Bibliography
53977 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53978 LatexCommand bibitem
53985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53987 name "Documentation"
53988 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53993 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53999 \begin_inset Index idx
54002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54004 packages ! microtype
54010 \begin_inset Newline newline
54014 \begin_inset Flex URL
54017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54019 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54027 \begin_layout Bibliography
54028 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54029 LatexCommand bibitem
54036 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54038 name "Documentation"
54039 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54044 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54050 \begin_inset Index idx
54053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54061 \begin_inset Newline newline
54065 \begin_inset Flex URL
54068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54070 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54078 \begin_layout Bibliography
54079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54080 LatexCommand bibitem
54087 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54089 name "Documentation"
54090 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54095 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54101 \begin_inset Index idx
54104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54106 packages ! prettyref
54112 \begin_inset Newline newline
54116 \begin_inset Flex URL
54119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54121 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54129 \begin_layout Bibliography
54130 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54131 LatexCommand bibitem
54138 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54140 name "Documentation"
54141 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54146 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54152 \begin_inset Index idx
54155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54157 packages ! refstyle
54163 \begin_inset Newline newline
54167 \begin_inset Flex URL
54170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54172 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54180 \begin_layout Bibliography
54181 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54182 LatexCommand bibitem
54189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54192 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54197 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54199 \begin_inset Newline newline
54203 \begin_inset Flex URL
54206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54208 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54216 \begin_layout Bibliography
54217 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54218 LatexCommand bibitem
54225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54228 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54233 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54235 \begin_inset Newline newline
54239 \begin_inset Flex URL
54242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54244 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54252 \begin_layout Bibliography
54253 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54254 LatexCommand bibitem
54261 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54264 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54269 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54270 for Cyrillic languages:
54271 \begin_inset Newline newline
54275 \begin_inset Flex URL
54278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54280 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54288 \begin_layout Bibliography
54289 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54290 LatexCommand bibitem
54297 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54300 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54305 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54307 \begin_inset Newline newline
54311 \begin_inset Flex URL
54314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54316 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54324 \begin_layout Bibliography
54325 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54326 LatexCommand bibitem
54333 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54336 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54341 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54343 \begin_inset Newline newline
54347 \begin_inset Flex URL
54350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54352 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54360 \begin_layout Bibliography
54361 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54362 LatexCommand bibitem
54369 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54372 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54377 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54379 \begin_inset Newline newline
54383 \begin_inset Flex URL
54386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54388 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54396 \begin_layout Standard
54397 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54431 \begin_inset Note Note
54434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54441 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54442 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54443 bibliography is the second one:
54451 \begin_layout Standard
54452 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54453 LatexCommand bibtex
54454 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54455 options "biblio/alphadin"
54462 \begin_layout Standard
54463 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54467 \begin_layout Standard
54471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54477 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54486 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54494 \begin_inset Note Note
54497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54498 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54499 \begin_inset space ~
54503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54505 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54517 \begin_layout Standard
54518 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54519 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54525 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54526 LatexCommand printindex